EMS Aviation HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal satellite terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual

Below you will find brief information for satellite terminal HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. This manual provides procedures for the equipment, including information on system overview, installation, and maintenance. It covers topics such as registering and activating the terminal, configuring user devices for ISDN services, performing system power-up checks, and troubleshooting issues.

PDF

Document

eNfusion

®

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual

MN-1252-33412, Revision 001

This document provides procedures for the equipment listed below.

Model eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

115 V ac or 28 V dc

Part Number

1252-A-3820-01

23-15-30

TITLE PAGE T-1

3 JUN 10

PROPRIETARY STATEMENT

This document contains information which is proprietary and confidential to EMS Aviation (EMS Technologies

Canada, Ltd., Formation Inc., Sky Connect LLC). Neither this document nor the information contained within may be used for any purpose other than the purpose for which it was prepared. Neither this document nor the information contained within may be disclosed or copied without the prior written permission of EMS Aviation.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual

Document Number: MN-1252-33412, Revision 001

Revision

001 N/A

ECR

Revision Table

Description

Draft release for review.

Cabin Network Xcelerator® and CNX® are registered trademarks of EMS Technologies, Ltd. Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other product, brand, service, and company names herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Our products are under continuous research and development. Any information may therefore be changed without prior notice. EMS Aviation reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the product described in this manual at any time without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, EMS Aviation assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein.

Printed in Canada.

EMS Aviation

400 Maple Grove Road, Ottawa, Ontario, K2V 1B8, CANADA

EMS Aviation Reception:

EMS Aviation Product Support:

(613) 591-9064

(888) 300-7415 (calls are routed to an on-call Product Support specialist after regular business hours)

+44 1684 290 020 (UK)

EMS Aviation E-mail Help:

(613) 591-3086 (outside North America) [email protected]

EMS Aviation Web site: www.emsaviation.com

EMS Aviation Sales and Marketing: 800-600-9759

23-15-30

TITLE PAGE T-2

3 JUN 10

CUSTOMER RESPONSE FORM

To help us improve the quality of our product documentation, EMS Aviation would appreciate your comments and suggestions on this publication. Please complete the following customer survey and send to EMS Aviation at:

EMS Aviation

400 Maple Grove Road

Ottawa, ON K2C 0P9

E-mail: [email protected]

Publication information:

Publication number:

Publication title:

Latest issue date:

Document revision:

MN-1252-33412

HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalSystem Description, Installation, and

Maintenance Manual

June 3, 2010

001

Customer information:

Name:

Company:

Tel:

Fax:

Email:

Comments and suggestions:

Date:

Comments:

23-15-30

CR-1

3 JUN 10

Blank Page

23-15-30

CR-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

RECORD OF REVISIONS

When revisions are received, insert revised pages, record the date, and initial.

Revision

Number

Issue

Date

Inserted

Inserted by (initial)

Revision

Number

Issue

Date

Inserted

Inserted by (initial)

23-15-30

RR-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

RR-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

SERVICE BULLETIN LIST

Service Bulletin

Number

N/A N/A

Subject

Manual Rev.

Number

Manual Rev.

Date

N/A N/A

23-15-30

SBL-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

SBL-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

* An asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current revision.

F indicates a right foldout page with a blank back.

Section Page Date

23-15-30

LEP-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

LEP-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

1. Illustration of Equipment .............................................................................INTRO-2

2. Product Terms and Conditions ...................................................................INTRO-2

3. Acronyms and Abbreviations......................................................................INTRO-2

4. Safety Advisories .........................................................................................INTRO-6

1. Inmarsat System Overview................................................................................... 1-1

2. Equipment Overview ............................................................................................. 1-3

3. Equipment Specifications..................................................................................... 1-5

4. System Interfaces................................................................................................ 1-10

A. Central Maintenance Computer (CMC) .......................................................................... 1-10

B. Source Destination Identification (SDI) .......................................................................... 1-11

C. FWD IDs, ICAO IDs, and IMSI ....................................................................................... 1-11

D. Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) Pin Wiring ............................................................................ 1-11

E. IRS ARINC 429 Interface ............................................................................................... 1-12

F. Antenna Interface ........................................................................................................... 1-14

G. CMU .............................................................................................................................. 1-14

H. Antenna Subsystem RF Interface .................................................................................. 1-14

5. User Interfaces..................................................................................................... 1-14

A. MCDU ............................................................................................................................ 1-14

B. WSC ............................................................................................................................... 1-15

C. Remote Reset ................................................................................................................ 1-15

D. ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface ............................................................................ 1-15

E. Ethernet Data Interfaces ................................................................................................ 1-16

F. POTS Tip/Ring Interfaces ............................................................................................... 1-16

G. CEPT-E1 Interface ......................................................................................................... 1-17

H. Maintenance Port Interface ............................................................................................ 1-17

(1) End User Access: Level 1 .......................................................................................... 1-17

(2) Field Representative Access: Level 2 ........................................................................ 1-17

I. Fault Indicator LED .......................................................................................................... 1-18

J. Self-Test ......................................................................................................................... 1-19

K. Remote Status Panel (Optional) .................................................................................... 1-19

23-15-30

TC-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

6. Software Description .......................................................................................... 1-19

A. Software Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-19

B. Operational Software Part Numbers .............................................................................. 1-19

C. Owner Requirements Table (ORT) ................................................................................ 1-20

1. Registering and Activating Terminals ................................................................. 2-1

A. Preparing Terminal Information ....................................................................................... 2-1

(1) Obtaining ISNs ............................................................................................................. 2-1

(2) Identifying the Swift 64 Service Category and Terminal Type ..................................... 2-1

B. Obtaining ICAO Addresses .............................................................................................. 2-2

C. Choosing Service Providers ............................................................................................ 2-2

D. Registering Terminals ...................................................................................................... 2-2

2. Configuring Terminals .......................................................................................... 2-3

A. Setting up Airborne Networks .......................................................................................... 2-3

B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services ....................................................................... 2-3

C. IMNs ................................................................................................................................ 2-3

D. MSNs ............................................................................................................................... 2-3

E. Configuring User ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) .................. 2-4

F. Configuring Secure ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) ............... 2-4

G. Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) ................................................. 2-4

H. Understanding CMU Messages ....................................................................................... 2-4

I. Configuring Swift 64 LES Access Codes ......................................................................... 2-4

(1) General Overview ........................................................................................................ 2-4

(2) Changing Default LESs Using the MPU....................................................................... 2-5

J. Removing the LED Label .................................................................................................. 2-6

K. Activating Configurations ................................................................................................. 2-6

L. Verifying Configurations ................................................................................................... 2-7

3. Using Terminals .................................................................................................... 2-7

A. Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls .................................................. 2-7

(1) Dial Code Prefixes ....................................................................................................... 2-8

(2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication............................................................................... 2-10

B. Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface ...................................................................... 2-11

C. Using Data Connections ................................................................................................ 2-11

D. Operating the MCDU ..................................................................................................... 2-11

(1) Output Ports ............................................................................................................... 2-11

(2) Input Ports.................................................................................................................. 2-11

(3) Screen........................................................................................................................ 2-11

23-15-30

TC-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(4) Keyboard.................................................................................................................... 2-12

(5) Special Symbols......................................................................................................... 2-12

(6) Navigating the MCDU ................................................................................................ 2-13

(7) Viewing Flight Information.......................................................................................... 2-14

(8) Logging On and Off.................................................................................................... 2-14

(9) Viewing Channel Information ..................................................................................... 2-17

(10) Viewing Maintenance Information ............................................................................ 2-21

(11) Configuring Headsets............................................................................................... 2-23

E. Operating the WSC ........................................................................................................ 2-23

F. Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDU .................................................... 2-24

(1) Modes of Operation.................................................................................................... 2-24

(2) Accepting and Making Calls....................................................................................... 2-24

1. Advisories .............................................................................................................. 3-1

2. Pre-Installation Inspection ................................................................................... 3-1

A. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment ............................................................................. 3-1

B. Cabling Notes .................................................................................................................. 3-1

(1) Cabling ......................................................................................................................... 3-2

(2) Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations ............................................................................. 3-2

3. Mechanical Installation ......................................................................................... 3-2

A. Physical Placement .......................................................................................................... 3-2

B. Environmental Requirements ........................................................................................... 3-2

(1) Heating and Cooling..................................................................................................... 3-2

(2) Fan Tray Requirements ............................................................................................... 3-3

C. Chassis Grounding .......................................................................................................... 3-4

4. Electrical Installation ............................................................................................ 3-4

A. Cabling and Connector Requirements ............................................................................. 3-4

(1) Power Requirements.................................................................................................... 3-4

(2) Ground Requirements.................................................................................................. 3-4

(3) Cable Shielding and Termination ................................................................................. 3-4

B. Installation Wiring Notes .................................................................................................. 3-5

(1) Source/Destination Identification.................................................................................. 3-5

(2) Maintenance Port Interface .......................................................................................... 3-5

(3) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface ................................................................................ 3-6

(4) WOW Pins.................................................................................................................... 3-6

(5) ICAO IDs ...................................................................................................................... 3-7

(6) Remote Status Panel (Optional) .................................................................................. 3-9

(7) System Configuration Strapping ................................................................................ 3-10

(8) System Mode Strap Pins Coding ............................................................................... 3-10

(9) Call Light Activation Strapping ................................................................................... 3-11

23-15-30

TC-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(10) Hookswitch Strapping .............................................................................................. 3-11

(11) Priority 4 Call Strapping............................................................................................ 3-11

(12) Cockpit Voice Strapping........................................................................................... 3-12

(13) User Interfaces......................................................................................................... 3-12

(14) System Interfaces .................................................................................................... 3-13

C. Connection Details ......................................................................................................... 3-15

5. Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test................................................................... 3-16

A. Overview ........................................................................................................................ 3-16

B. PIM Requirements ......................................................................................................... 3-16

C. PIM Test ........................................................................................................................ 3-16

D. PIM Test Results ........................................................................................................... 3-17

(1) PIM Test Overall Status ............................................................................................. 3-17

(2) Directional PIM Test Results...................................................................................... 3-19

6. Installation and Engineering Diagrams ............................................................. 3-19

A. Outline and Installation Diagrams .................................................................................. 3-19

B. Interconnection and Contact Assignment Drawings ...................................................... 3-19

7. Connection Details .............................................................................................. 3-19

1. Operational and Diagnostic Testing .................................................................. 4-35

A. General .......................................................................................................................... 4-35

B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements ........................................................ 4-35

C. Terminal Maintenance Port Utility .................................................................................. 4-36

(1) General Overview ...................................................................................................... 4-36

(2) Connection Requirements.......................................................................................... 4-37

(3) Accessing the MPU.................................................................................................... 4-39

(4) Using the Terminal MPU ............................................................................................ 4-39

(5) Menu Item Descriptions ............................................................................................. 4-40

(6) Report Descriptions.................................................................................................... 4-53

(7) Activating Maintenance Reports ................................................................................ 4-56

D. Inmarsat Cause Codes .................................................................................................. 4-60

E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures ................................................................ 4-60

(1) Test Setup Procedure ................................................................................................ 4-61

(2) Post Test .................................................................................................................... 4-61

(3) Installation and Operational Verification Tests........................................................... 4-62

(4) Configuration Parameters Verification ....................................................................... 4-63

(5) System Power-up Checks.......................................................................................... 4-68

(6) System On-Air Checks............................................................................................... 4-70

(7) Antenna Tracking Checks .......................................................................................... 4-72

(8) Optional System Checks............................................................................................ 4-73

23-15-30

TC-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

2. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation ................................................................. 4-74

A. Troubleshooting Practices ............................................................................................. 4-74

(1) Non-specific Complaints ............................................................................................ 4-74

(2) Specific Complaints.................................................................................................... 4-74

B. Equipment Required ...................................................................................................... 4-74

C. Troubleshooting Aids ..................................................................................................... 4-74

(1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays.................................................................................. 4-75

(2) Troubleshooting Table ............................................................................................... 4-79

D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures .................................................................... 4-86

(1) General ...................................................................................................................... 4-86

(2) Saving a Diagnostic Reports File ............................................................................... 4-86

3. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures ................................................................... 4-88

4. Modification History ............................................................................................ 4-88

1. Maintenance........................................................................................................... 5-1

2. Repair ..................................................................................................................... 5-1

A. Repair Tools and Supplies ............................................................................................... 5-1

B. Repair Procedures ........................................................................................................... 5-1

C. Battery Replacement ....................................................................................................... 5-1

D. Removal Procedures ....................................................................................................... 5-1

E. Repair Facility Approvals ................................................................................................. 5-1

F. Return for Repair Information ........................................................................................... 5-2

3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness .......................................................... 5-2

1. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU .................................................... 6-1

A. Connecting to the MPU .................................................................................................... 6-4

B. Configuring the ORT Part Number ................................................................................... 6-4

C. Configuring Cockpit Communication Parameters ............................................................ 6-5

(1) Configuring the Call Signaling Mode............................................................................ 6-5

(2) Configuring Outgoing Call Signaling ............................................................................ 6-5

(3) Configuring Ground Public Routing.............................................................................. 6-5

D. Configuring 4-wire Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-6

(1) Configuring 4-wire Wiring............................................................................................. 6-6

(2) Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call Routing................................................................ 6-6

(3) Configuring 4-wire Parameters .................................................................................... 6-6

E. Configuring POTS Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-7

(1) Configuring POTS ........................................................................................................ 6-7

23-15-30

TC-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

F. Configuring CEPT-E1 Parameters .................................................................................... 6-7

(1) Configuring CEPT-E1 Interface.................................................................................... 6-8

(2) Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface Type..................................................................... 6-8

G. Configuring High Speed Data Services ........................................................................... 6-8

(1) Configuring the Default PPPoE Service....................................................................... 6-8

(2) Configuring SCPC High Speed Service ....................................................................... 6-8

(3) Configuring MPDS High Speed Service....................................................................... 6-9

(4) Configuring SBB High Speed Service.......................................................................... 6-9

H. Configuring Ethernet Parameters .................................................................................... 6-9

(1) Configuring Ethernet Wiring ......................................................................................... 6-9

(2) Configuring Ethernet Duplex Mode ............................................................................ 6-10

(3) Configuring the Ethernet Port Address ...................................................................... 6-10

(4) Configuring the Ethernet Mask................................................................................... 6-10

I. Configuring Networking Parameters For Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 ............................... 6-11

(1) Configuring the Host Name........................................................................................ 6-11

(2) Configuring the Access Concentrator Name.............................................................. 6-11

(3) Configuring the SNMP Server.................................................................................... 6-11

(4) Configuring the SNMP Community String.................................................................. 6-11

(5) Configuring the TFTP Server ..................................................................................... 6-12

(6) Configuring the DHCP Client ..................................................................................... 6-12

(7) Configuring the DHCP Server .................................................................................... 6-12

(8) Configuring Telnet Access ......................................................................................... 6-12

(9) Configuring the Managed Range ............................................................................... 6-12

(10) Configuring the Number of Managed Addresses ..................................................... 6-13

(11) Configuring the Access Point Name......................................................................... 6-13

J. Configuring Avionics Parameters ................................................................................... 6-13

(1) Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS).......................................... 6-13

(2) Configuring the Secondary IRS.................................................................................. 6-14

(3) Configuring the Secondary IRS Input Speed ............................................................. 6-14

(4) Configuring GNSS Equipment ................................................................................... 6-14

(5) Configuring the ICAO Code Source ........................................................................... 6-15

K. Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters .............................................................. 6-15

(1) Configuring the Forward ID ........................................................................................ 6-15

(2) Configuring Satellite Information ................................................................................ 6-16

(3) Configuring GES Service Provider Information.......................................................... 6-17

(4) Configuring the Frequency Table............................................................................... 6-18

(5) Configuring LES Service Provider Information........................................................... 6-19

(6) Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing Mode........................................................... 6-19

(7) Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card One ............................................. 6-20

(8) Configuring the Service Type Priority......................................................................... 6-20

23-15-30

TC-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

L. Configuring Antenna ORT Parameters .......................................................................... 6-20

(1) Configuring the Antenna Type ................................................................................... 6-20

(2) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation Angle .................................................... 6-21

(3) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch Angle ......................................................... 6-21

(4) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll Angle ........................................................... 6-21

(5) Configuring the HPA to Antenna Loss........................................................................ 6-22

(6) Configuring the Diplexer............................................................................................. 6-22

M. Configuring MCDU ORT Parameters ............................................................................ 6-23

(1) Configuring MCDU Wiring.......................................................................................... 6-23

(2) Configuring the MCDU Input Speed........................................................................... 6-23

(3) Configuring the MCDU Output Speed........................................................................ 6-23

(4) Configuring the MCDU Controller Type ..................................................................... 6-23

(5) Configuring the MCDU Type ...................................................................................... 6-24

(6) Configuring the MCDU Font Colour ........................................................................... 6-24

(7) Configuring Manual Dialing ........................................................................................ 6-24

(8) Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection ................................................................... 6-24

(9) Configuring the Address Book Categories ................................................................. 6-25

N. Configuring the CMU ..................................................................................................... 6-25

(1) Configuring CMU Wiring ............................................................................................ 6-25

(2) Configuring the CMU Input Speed ............................................................................. 6-26

(3) Configuring the CMU Output Speed .......................................................................... 6-26

(4) Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave Word............................................................. 6-26

(5) Configuring Hardcoded SAL ...................................................................................... 6-27

O. Configuring Terminal Operation .................................................................................... 6-27

(1) Configuring Air/Ground Status Restrictions ............................................................... 6-27

(2) Configuring Transmit on Ground................................................................................ 6-27

(3) Configuring Self-test in Air ......................................................................................... 6-28

(4) Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in Air................................................ 6-28

(5) Configuring MCDU PAST........................................................................................... 6-28

(6) Configuring Field Loadable Software ......................................................................... 6-28

(7) Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy..................................................................... 6-29

(8) Configuring Logon Interrogation................................................................................. 6-29

(9) Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam................................................................. 6-29

(10) Masking Position in Logs ......................................................................................... 6-29

(11) Configuring HSD SAL............................................................................................... 6-30

P. Configuring Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Parameters ................................................ 6-30

(1) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle ........................................................ 6-30

(2) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle.......................................................... 6-30

(3) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1 ...................................................... 6-31

(4) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2 ...................................................... 6-31

(5) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1 .................................................... 6-31

23-15-30

TC-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(6) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2 .................................................... 6-31

(7) Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio ...................................................... 6-31

(8) Configuring PIMBIT Failure Threshold....................................................................... 6-32

(9) Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold......................................................... 6-32

2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application...................... 6-32

A. Creating an ORT Configuration ..................................................................................... 6-33

B. Opening a Saved ORT Configuration ............................................................................ 6-35

C. Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration .................................................... 6-35

D. Exporting an ORT File ................................................................................................... 6-37

E. Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal .............................................. 6-37

1. I-3 Satellites .......................................................................................................... A-1

2. I-4 Satellites .......................................................................................................... A-4

1. Understanding Messages Transmitted to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ........ F-1

A. Understanding System Identification Label 172 ...............................................................F-1

B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 ........................................................................F-1

C. Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276 ........................................................................F-2

D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to SDU1 via Williamsburg ....................................F-2

2. Understanding Messages Received from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal......... F-2

A. Understanding System Identification Label 172 ...............................................................F-2

B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270 ........................................................................F-3

C. Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271 ....................................................................F-5

D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg ......................................F-6

3. Understanding BOP Options................................................................................ F-6

4. Understanding LDUs and File Size ...................................................................... F-7

5. Understanding LDU Size and Word Count ......................................................... F-7

6. Understanding Word Format................................................................................ F-7

A. Understanding SALs ........................................................................................................F-7

B. Understanding Data .........................................................................................................F-7

C. Understanding General Format Identifier (GFI) Definitions .............................................F-8

7. Understanding Word Types ................................................................................. F-8

A. Understanding the Full Binary Data Word .......................................................................F-9

B. Understanding the Partial Binary Data Word ...................................................................F-9

C. Understanding Protocol Words ........................................................................................F-9

23-15-30

TC-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

D. Understanding the Solo Word ........................................................................................F-10

E. Understanding Start of Transmission (SOT) .................................................................. F-11

F. Understanding End of Transmission (EOT) .................................................................... F-11

23-15-30

TC-9

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

TC-10

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure INTRO-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal........................................................................INTRO-2

Figure 1-1 Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System ........................................ 1-2

Figure 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal SCM................................................................................. 1-4

Figure 1-3 HSD-440Stand-Alone Terminal Interfaces ............................................................... 1-10

Figure 1-4 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ISDN Connections ......................................................... 1-16

Figure 2-1 Dialing-Sequence Components.................................................................................. 2-7

Figure 2-2 Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence.......................................................................... 2-10

Figure 2-3 MCDU Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-12

Figure 2-4 MCDU Menus ........................................................................................................... 2-13

Figure 3-1 Fan Tray Plug Configuration (black = installed, white = removed) ............................. 3-3

Figure 3-2 ICAO ID, Hex to Binary Conversion ........................................................................... 3-8

Figure 3-3 Remote Reset Circuit Switch...................................................................................... 3-9

Figure 3-4 Remote LED Panel Circuit........................................................................................ 3-10

Figure 3-5 RJ45 Connector Terminator Details ......................................................................... 3-13

Figure 3-6 Example PIM Test Results ....................................................................................... 3-18

Figure 3-7 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram

(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A) ............................................................................................... 3-27

Figure 3-8 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram

(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A) ............................................................................................... 3-29

Figure 3-9 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B) ............................................... 3-31

Figure 3-10 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B) ............................................... 3-33

Figure 4-1 Remote Connection, Maintenance Cable................................................................. 4-38

Figure 4-2 Direct Connection, Maintenance Cable .................................................................... 4-38

Figure 4-3 Menu 2 Screen Display ............................................................................................ 4-42

Figure 4-4 Menu 3 Screen Display ............................................................................................ 4-43

Figure 4-5 Menu 3 - Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM Parameters .......................................... 4-45

Figure 4-6 Menu 4 Screen Display ............................................................................................ 4-48

Figure 4-7 Menu 10 Screen Display .......................................................................................... 4-49

Figure 4-8 Menu 13 Screen Display .......................................................................................... 4-50

Figure 4-9 Menu 14 Screen Display .......................................................................................... 4-51

Figure 4-10 Menu 15 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-51

Figure 4-11 Menu 21 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-52

23-15-30

TC-11

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 4-12 Menu 30 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-53

Figure 4-13 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Reports .............................................................. 4-56

Figure 4-14 Example Report 23 Output ..................................................................................... 4-57

Figure 4-15 Prompt to Select Channel for Report Generation................................................... 4-58

Figure 4-16 Example of Report 17, Channel Card 2, Channel 3 ............................................... 4-58

Figure 4-17 Example of Report 20............................................................................................. 4-59

Figure 4-18 Example Report 21................................................................................................. 4-59

Figure 4-19 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT Display Example ................................................. 4-67

Figure 4-20 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Power-Up Display Example ......................................... 4-70

Figure 4-21 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Call Display Example.................................................. 4-72

Figure 4-22 Successful OR Registration (report 21 activated) .................................................. 4-75

Figure 4-23 Failed OR Registration ........................................................................................... 4-75

Figure 4-24 No Call (report 23) .................................................................................................. 4-75

Figure 4-25 In Call—Swift 64 Voice Call on Channel 1 (reports 21 and 23).............................. 4-75

Figure 4-26 No IRS Data (report 23 activated) .......................................................................... 4-76

Figure 4-27 FWD ID Not Strapped (no reports activated) ......................................................... 4-76

Figure 4-28 No Strap on SDI Lines, Open (no reports activated) .............................................. 4-77

Figure 4-29 Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND) ............................................................ 4-78

Figure 4-30 Incorrect Dialing Format (report 52 enabled) ......................................................... 4-78

Figure 4-31 Top/Port Antenna Status (reports 18, 19, and 20 activated) .................................. 4-79

Figure A-1 ORs ............................................................................................................................A-1

Figure A-2 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—Composite Map ..........................................A-2

Figure A-3 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—OR Maps ....................................................A-3

Figure A-4 Inmarsat I-4 Satellite Beam Coverage Map ...............................................................A-4

23-15-30

TC-12

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications ................................... 1-5

Table 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics .............. 1-8

Table 1-3 Inertial Type Labels .................................................................................................. 1-12

Table 1-4 GNSS Type Labels ................................................................................................... 1-12

Table 1-5 Hybrid Type Labels................................................................................................... 1-13

Table 1-6 AES ID Type Labels ................................................................................................. 1-14

Table 1-7 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal LED Output Designations .............................................. 1-18

Table 1-8 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Operational Software ..................................................... 1-19

Table 2-1 Inmarsat Swift 64 LES Operator and Access Codes .................................................. 2-5

Table 2-2 Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection .............................................. 2-8

Table 2-3 Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides ................................................................. 2-10

Table 2-4 Call Discrete Outputs in HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ................................................. 2-25

Table 2-5 Priority Codes ........................................................................................................... 2-26

Table 3-1 Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications ........................................................ 3-5

Table 3-2 RF Parameters Definitions.......................................................................................... 3-6

Table 3-3 WOW Pin Wiring......................................................................................................... 3-7

Table 3-4 Configuration Pin Summary...................................................................................... 3-10

Table 3-5 System Pin Strapping ............................................................................................... 3-11

Table 3-6 Call Light Activation Configuration Strapping ........................................................... 3-11

Table 3-7 Hookswitch Configuration Strapping......................................................................... 3-11

Table 3-8 Priority 4 Call Configuration Strapping...................................................................... 3-12

Table 3-9 Chime and Light Strapping for Cockpit Voice ........................................................... 3-12

Table 3-10 RJ45 Wiring Details ................................................................................................ 3-13

Table 3-11 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to BSU Interconnects ................................................... 3-14

Table 3-12 CMU Strapping ....................................................................................................... 3-15

Table 3-13 MCDU Strapping..................................................................................................... 3-15

Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details............................... 3-20

Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details .......................... 3-23

Table 3-16 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Bottom Plug Connection Details ......................... 3-26

Table 4-1 List of Required Test Equipment .............................................................................. 4-36

Table 4-2 List of Optional Test Equipment................................................................................ 4-36

Table 4-3 Remote Connection Cabling..................................................................................... 4-37

Table 4-4 Direct Connection Cabling ........................................................................................ 4-37

23-15-30

TC-13

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-5 Terminal Connection Settings .................................................................................. 4-39

Table 4-6 Menu 1 Item Descriptions ......................................................................................... 4-41

Table 4-7 Menu 2 Item Descriptions ......................................................................................... 4-42

Table 4-8 Menu 3 Item Descriptions ......................................................................................... 4-43

Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions.................................................. 4-45

Table 4-10 Menu 4 Item Descriptions ....................................................................................... 4-48

Table 4-11 Menu 10 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-49

Table 4-12 Menu 13 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-50

Table 4-13 Menu 14 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-51

Table 4-14 Menu 15 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-52

Table 4-15 Menu 21 Item Descriptions ..................................................................................... 4-52

Table 4-16 Menu 30 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-53

Table 4-17 Report 23 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-57

Table 4-18 Reports 8 and 20 Item Descriptions ....................................................................... 4-59

Table 4-19 Report 21 Item Descriptions ................................................................................... 4-60

Table 4-20 Test Setup Procedure............................................................................................. 4-61

Table 4-21 Post Test Procedure ............................................................................................... 4-61

Table 4-22 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Mechanical Verification ............................................... 4-62

Table 4-23 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist ................................... 4-62

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation ....................................................................... 4-80

Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters......................................................................... 6-1

Table 6-2 User ORT Parameters ................................................................................................ 6-4

Table F-1 Status Word 1.............................................................................................................F-1

Table F-2 Bits 9 and 10 Positions ...............................................................................................F-2

Table F-3 Status Word 1 Bits......................................................................................................F-3

Table F-4 Join/Leave Word Bits .................................................................................................F-5

Table F-5 BOP Option Defaults ..................................................................................................F-6

Table F-6 BOP Word Format ......................................................................................................F-7

Table F-7 GFI Definitions............................................................................................................F-8

Table F-8 Word Types ................................................................................................................F-8

Table F-9 Protocol Words and Uses...........................................................................................F-9

Table F-10 Data Types ............................................................................................................. F-10

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes ................................................................. G-1

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions ............................................................................. H-1

23-15-30

TC-14

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

INTRODUCTION

This manual provides the specifications, principles of operation, and information necessary to install the:

• HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, 1252-A-3820-01

This document is divided into the following sections:

•

System Description

•

System Operation

•

Installation

•

Test and Fault Isolation

•

Maintenance and Repair

•

Configuring the Owners Requirements Table (ORT)

•

Appendix A: Inmarsat Satellite Beam Coverage

•

Appendix B: Troubleshooting Checklist

•

Appendix C: RJ45 Cable Termination Details

•

Appendix D: Installation Planning Checklist

•

Appendix E: Installation Checklist

•

Appendix F: CMU Messages

•

Appendix G: International Access and Country Codes

•

Appendix H: Inmarsat Cause Codes

• Appendix I: CMC Messages

NOTE: An Illustrated Parts List is not included with this manual.

Only qualified avionics personnel who are knowledgeable in the technical and safety issues related to the installation of aircraft communications equipment should perform the installation procedures provided in this manual.

This manual includes general installation guidelines only; it is not intended to provide specific procedures for every type of installation.

If necessary, the information in this manual will be revised. Before attempting the installation procedures presented in this manual, verify that you have a complete and up-to-date release of this document.

NOTE: Depending on your HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s software version and configuration, the actual (live) system messages you see, such as dialog boxes and screen displays, may differ slightly from the examples in this manual.

23-15-30

INTRO-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

1. Illustration of Equipment

Figure INTRO-1 shows the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

Figure INTRO-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

2. Product Terms and Conditions

As stipulated in the Terms and Conditions of Sale, which accompanied the Product, EMS

Aviation shall not at any time be liable for the activation, continuation, or cancellation of satellite airtime services relating to the Product nor be responsible for any Product-related airtime or network charges, however incurred. In the event EMS Aviation is charged network or airtime fees relating to the customer’s use of the Product, the customer shall immediately upon notification by EMS Aviation reimburse EMS Aviation in full for such charges.

3. Acronyms and Abbreviations

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in this document.

AC ac

ACARS

ACP

ACSE

ACU

AERO

AES

AMBE

Access Concentrator

Alternating Current

Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System

Audio Control Panel

Access Control and Signalling Equipment

Antenna Control Unit (also known as BSU or Driver)

Aeronautical

Aircraft Earth Station

Advanced Multi Band Excitation

23-15-30

INTRO-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

FET

FMS

FRLP

FWD ID

GES

GND

GNSS

HGA

HPA

HTML

CFDS

CMC

CMU

CRC

CW dc

DITS

DLNA

DSL

D-UART

EIRP

EMI

ESD

EST

EMEA

FAA

BGAN

BITE

BOP bps

BRI

BSU

C/No

CCW

Americas Americas (satellite)

AMO

AOR-E

Approved Maintenance Organization

Atlantic Ocean Region-East

AOR-W

APAC

ATC

AWG

Atlantic Ocean Region-West

Asia-Pacific (satellite)

Air Traffic Control

American Wire Gauge

Broadband Global Area Network

Built-In Test Equipment

Bit Oriented Protocol

Bits per second

Basic Rate ISDN

Beam Steering Unit (also known as ACU or Driver)

Carrier-to-Noise

Counter Clockwise

Centralized Fault Display System

Central Maintenance Computer

Communications Management Unit

Cyclic Redundancy Check

Clockwise

Direct Current

Digital Information Transfer System

Diplexer/Low-Noise Amplifier

Digital Subscriber Line

Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter

Effect Isotropic Radiated Power

Electromagnetic Interference

Electrostatic Discharge

Eastern Standard Time

Europe / Middle East Africa (satellite)

Federal Aviation Authority

Field-Effect Transistor

Flight Management System

Forward Return Link Pair

Forward ID

Ground Earth Station

Ground

Global Navigation Satellite System

High-gain Antenna

High Power Amplifier

Hyper Text Markup Language

Hertz

23-15-30

INTRO-3

3 JUN 10

LAN

LES

LRU

LSB

Mbps

MCDU

MCU

MES

M-ISDN

MPDS

MPU ms

MSB

MSN

IOR

IRS

ISDN

ISN

ISP

JAA kbps

I/O

ICAO

ICD

IMEI

IMSI

IMN

INS

MSN

MTSAT

NAT

O&I

OCXO

OEM

ORR

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Input/Output

International Civil Aviation Organization

Interconnection Drawing

International Mobile Equipment Identifier

International Mobile Subscriber Identifier

Inmarsat Mobile Number

Inertial Navigational System

Indian Ocean Region

Inertial Reference System

Integrated Services Digital Network

Inmarsat Serial Number

Inmarsat Service Providers

Internet Service Provider

Joint Aviation Authorities

Kilobits per Second

Local Area Network

Land Earth Station

Line Replaceable Unit line select

Least Significant Bit

Mechanical Steered Antenna

Megabit per second

Multipurpose Control Display Unit

Modular Concept Unit

Mobile Earth Station

Mobile Integrated Services Digital Network

Mobile Packet Data Services

Maintenance Port Utility

Millisecond

Most Significant Bit

Mobile Serial Number

Multiple Subscriber Number

Meteorological Satellite

Network Address Translation normally open

Network Terminator

Outline and Installation Diagram

Other Antenna

Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator

Original Equipment Manufacturer

Ocean Region

Ocean Region Registration

23-15-30

INTRO-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

STU

TFTP

USIM

VHF

VSWR

WOW

SCM

SCPC

SDI

SDU

SNAC

SPID

STBD

STE

ORT

PAST

PIM

POR

POST

POTS

PPP

PPPoE

PSTN

PTT

RAM

REA

Owner Requirements Table

Person Activated Self Test

Personal Computer (or laptop)

Passive Intermodulation

Part Number

Pacific Ocean Region

Power On Self Test

Plain Old Telephone System

Point-to-Point Protocol

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

Public Switch Telephone Network

Push-to-Talk

Random Access Memory

Responsible Engineering Authority

Radio Frequency

RFI

RFU rms

ROM

Radio Frequency Interference

Radio Frequency Unit root mean square

Read-only Memory

RTN

Return

Receive

S/T (ISDN) ISDN ‘S interface’ refers to the electrical interface between NT1 and NT2 devices, such as a PBX. ISDN ‘T interface’ refers to the electrical interface between NT1 or NT2 and ISDN devices.

SBB SwiftBroadband

SDU Configuration Module

Single Channel per Carrier

Source/Destination Identification

Satellite Data Unit

Single Network Access Code

Service Profile Identifier

Starboard

Secure Terminal Equipment

Secure Telephone Unit

Terminal Adapter

Terminal Equipment

Trivial File Transfer Protocol

Transmit

Universal Subscriber Identity Module very high frequency

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio

Weight on Wheels

23-15-30

INTRO-5

3 JUN 10

WSC

WSCI

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Williamsburg SDU Controller

Williamsburg SDU Controller Interface

4. Safety Advisories

Warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual provide the reader with the following information:

• A WARNING describes an operation, procedure, or condition that, if not obeyed, could cause injury or death.

• A CAUTION describes an operation, procedure, or condition that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to the equipment.

• A NOTE provides supplementary information or explanatory text that makes it easier to understand and perform procedures.

All personnel who install, operate, and maintain the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and associated test equipment must know and obey the safety precautions listed below. The procedures provided in this manual assume that the person performing installation or maintenance tasks is familiar with and obeys standard aviation shop and safety practices.

The general safety advisories include the following:

WARNING: TO AVOID RISK OF INJURY FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, DISCONNECT THE

POWER FROM THE TERMINAL DURING INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL.

WARNING: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST OBEY STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS,

SUCH AS WEARING SAFETY GLASSES, TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY

WHILE INSTALLING OR PERFORMING SERVICE ON THIS TERMINAL.

WARNING: ASSOCIATED SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT RADIATES

HIGH FREQUENCY RADIATION AND POSES A RADIATION HAZARD OF 1.6

GHZ. SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST EXERCISE CARE TO KEEP CLEAR OF

THE ANTENNA'S BEAM WHILE PERFORMING OPERATIONAL TESTS OR

INSTALLATION VERIFICATION PROCEDURES.

DO NOT APPROACH WITHIN 8 FEET (2.5 METRES) OF THE ANTENNA

DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION).

DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION), MAKE SURE THAT

PERSONNEL ARE EXPOSED TO A MINIMUM OF ANY REFLECTED,

SCATTERED, OR DIRECT BEAMS.

CAUTION: TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY TERMINAL FROM

WIRING. DISCONNECTING THE TERMINAL WITHOUT TURNING POWER

OFF MAY CAUSE VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS THAT CAN DAMAGE THE

TERMINAL.

23-15-30

INTRO-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT INCLUDES ITEMS THAT ARE ELECTROSTATIC

DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES. ESDS DEVICES ARE SUBJECT

TO DAMAGE BY EXCESSIVE LEVELS OF VOLTAGE AND/OR CURRENT.

THE LOW-ENERGY SOURCE THAT MOST COMMONLY DESTROYS ESDS

DEVICES IS THE HUMAN BODY, WHICH, IN CONJUNCTION WITH

NONCONDUCTIVE GARMENTS AND FLOOR COVERINGS, GENERATES

AND RETAINS STATIC ELECTRICITY. TO ADEQUATELY PROTECT ESDS

DEVICES, THE DEVICE AND EVERYTHING THAT CONTACTS IT MUST BE

BROUGHT TO GROUND POTENTIAL BY PROVIDING A CONDUCTIVE

SURFACE AND DISCHARGE PATHS. USE STANDARD INDUSTRY

PRECAUTIONS TO KEEP RISK OF DAMAGE TO A MINIMUM WHEN

TOUCHING, REMOVING, OR SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT.

23-15-30

INTRO-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

INTRO-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

This section includes basic information about HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, and includes the following sections:

•

Inmarsat System Overview

•

Equipment Overview

•

Equipment Specifications

•

System Interfaces

•

User Interfaces

•

Software Description

1. Inmarsat System Overview

This section provides an overview of the Inmarsat satellite communications system and networks.

The satellite communication system includes global satellite networks, Land Earth Stations

(LESs), Ground Earth Stations (GESs), Aircraft Earth Stations (AESs), and Mobile Earth

Stations (MESs).

The LES/GES is the part of the satellite communication system that is on the ground. These numerous, international stations are responsible for routing voice and data calls from the

MES/AES to their destinations around the world.

The MES/AES is the part of the satellite communication system that is on the aircraft. This station includes the following components:

• HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Antenna subsystem

• Cabin communications system

• Analog connected telephones

• Cockpit voice system

• Other aircraft avionics

Figure 1-1 illustrates a simplified satellite communications system.

23-15-30

1-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 1-1 Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System

Satellite communication systems provide users with long-range voice and data communication by accessing global satellite and ground communications networks.

Inmarsat is an international organization that operates and maintains multiple geostationary satellites and satellite networks. Inmarsat networks provide services for aviation, shipping, and land-mobile terminals. Inmarsat provides information about satellite beam coverage at www.inmarsat.com.

Inmarsat’s I-3 satellites provide Aero H+ and Swift 64 services for aviation. The satellites connect to ground telecommunication systems through the LES/GES. Each satellite is located over an Ocean Region (OR)—the current OR names are:

• Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E)

• Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W)

• Indian Ocean Region (IOR)

• Pacific Ocean Region (POR)

23-15-30

1-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Inmarsat’s I-4 satellites provide SwiftBroadband (SBB) services and Aero H+ services. The three I-4 satellites are:

• Americas

• EMEA (Europe, Middle East and Africa)

• Asia-Pacific

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, in conjunction with an ARINC 741/781 High-gain Antenna

(HGA), acts as an MES/AES. The combined system provides users with a data and voice communications link to the satellite network and global telecommunications system.

2. Equipment Overview

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are scalable, high-speed data, satellite communications terminals that provide world-wide voice and data services to aircraft through high-speed communication links with the Inmarsat Satellite Network. HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals interface with ARINC

741/781-compatible antenna subsystems to communicate with the space segment of the

Inmarsat Satellite Network via L-band RF signals.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals communicate with various avionics equipment, such as the aircraft’s

IRS and CMU, to coordinate and access a wide range of services. The HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminals also communicate with cabin and cockpit voice and data equipment to provide phone, fax, Internet connection, and other services on board the aircraft.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals contain the following:

• One channel card for Swift 64 or SBB services

• One Classic Aero multi-channel channel card

• Data input/output (I/O) card

• High stability reference oscillator

• Control processor card

• High Power Amplifier (HPA)

• SDU Configuration Module (SCM)

• Universal (115 V ac 400 Hz / 28 V dc) power supply

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support the following services:

• Inmarsat Mobile Integrated Services Digital Network (M-ISDN) Single Channel Per Carrier

(SCPC) Service

• Inmarsat Mobile Packet Data Services (MPDS) via PPPoE

• Inmarsat Aero P, R, T channel data

• Two channels of Inmarsat Aero C channel H+ voice

23-15-30

1-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Cockpit communications for air-to-ground calls using the MCDU, or the WSC

• CEPT-E1

• SwiftBroadband (SBB) packet-switched and circuit-switched services

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal contains a SCM that has four SIM card slots. Each slot (and each SIM card) is associated with a specific channel. To use the SBB service, the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal obtains subscriber information from the SIM card installed in Slot 1. Slot 2 is reserved for future use. Channel card two provides Classic services and as Classic services

do not require a SIM card, slots 3 and 4 are not used. Figure 1-2 shows the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal SCM.

Figure 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal SCM

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals have four different types of ports that provide ISDN, CEPT-E1,

Ethernet, and Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) to users in the aircraft cabin. Although able to support multiple configurations depending on user needs, the following constraints apply:

• EURO ISDN S/T port supports:

• In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of 64kbps UDI, 56kbps Data, 64kbps 3.1kHz

Audio, or 64kbps Speech

• In SBB mode, one channel of 64kbps UDI, 56kbps Data, 64kbps 3.1kHz Audio, or

4kbps AMBE+2 Voice

• 10BASE-T port supports:

• In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of 64kbps data or MPDS through PPPoE

• In SBB mode, up to 11 simultaneous packet-switched (PS) data calls and one circuit-switched (CS) call

23-15-30

1-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• POTS supports:

• In Swift 64 mode, one or two channels of ISDN (speech) or 3.1kHz audio (fax)

• In SBB mode, one channel AMBE+2 voice or 3.1kHz audio (fax)

• CEPT-E1 is offered through the Aero-H+ service and offers 1 or 2 channels of voice

NOTE: Only one service type can be used at one time on aHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal channel.

Channel card 1 can support two channels of Swift 64 service when in this mode or one channel of SwiftBroadband service.

3. Equipment Specifications

This section includes the physical and environmental characteristics of HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminals.

Table 1-1 lists the physical characteristics and specifications for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.

Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications

Characteristic

Certification/related documents

ARINC characteristics

Specification

RTCA documents

HSD-440 Terminal Software

600-12, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces,

December 12, 1998

Attachment 10 of the ARINC 704-7

RTCA/DO-160E, Environmental Conditions and Test

Procedures for Airborne Equipment,

July 29, 1997

RTCA/DO-178B Level D/E (For more information, refer

to "Software Specifications" on page 1-19)

Physical Size

Height

Width

Length

Weight

Mounting information

Maintenance requirements

Electrical specifications

19.41 cm (7.64 in)

26.09 cm (10.27 in)

38.66 cm (15.22 in)

16.1 kg (35.5 lbs)

8-MCU Tray (per ARINC 600, 8-MCU LRU)

No scheduled maintenance is required

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal AC input power

Voltage Minimum: 92 V rms—min start voltage: 100V rms

Typical: 115 V rms

Maximum: 122 V rms

23-15-30

1-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications (Continued)

Characteristic

Power consumption

Specification

Maximum: 460 W

Frequency

Power Factor

NOTE: Of this power consumption, 400 W is dissipated internally and 60 W of RF power is dissipated externally.

Minimum: 360 Hz

Typical: 400 Hz

Maximum: 800 Hz

Leading: >0.77

Lagging: >0.62

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal DC input power

Voltage Minimum: 22 V dc for startup, 20.5 V dc for operation

Power consumption

Typical: 28 V dc

Maximum: 33.2 V dc

Maximum: 460 W

NOTE: Of this power consumption, 400 W is dissipated internally and 60 W of RF power is dissipated externally.

Power requirements

Wire gauge

Ground requirements

Circuit breakers

115 V ac, 400 Hz nominal, @ 4 A (460 W maximum)

+ 28 V dc @ 15.5 A (460 W maximum)

DC power: 12 AWG

AC power: 20 AWG (hot lead), 12 AWG (cold lead)

Signals: Unless otherwise specified, use 22 AWG for all signal wires

ARINC 741

Install circuit breakers according to the maintenance requirements of the aircraft.

Heating and cooling requirements

Cooling air

Flow rate

Pressure drop

Frequency band

Receive input impedance

Transmit output impedance

Transmit VSWR

External interfaces

External parameters

As per ARINC 600 Section 3.5.1.6 (220 kg/(kWhr)

88 kg/hr (194 lbs/hr) at air temperature 40ºC

5 ± 3 mm (0.20 ± 0.12 in.) of H

Tx:

Rx:

50 ohms

2:1 maximum

1626.5 to 1660.5 MHz

1525.0 to 1559.0 MHz

23-15-30

1-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 1-1 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Characteristics and Specifications (Continued)

Characteristic

Antenna gain (HGA)

Antenna to DLNA loss

DLNA gain

Specification

Minimum: 12 dB

Maximum: 17 dB

Maximum: 0.3 dB

Minimum: 53 dB

Maximum: 60 dB

Maximum: 1.8 dB

Minimum: 6 dB

DLNA noise

DLNA to HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal total loss

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to antenna loss

Maximum: 25 dB (Rx)

Minimum: 1 dB

DLNA insertion loss

External digital interfaces

Control interface

Maximum: 2.5 dB (Tx) (including DLNA loss)

Maximum: 0.8 dB

RS-232 maintenance interface

(rear and front connector)

Ethernet user interface (2)

ISDN () up to three MCDU (speed configurable) two CMUs

Multi-control bus

Top/Port and Starboard antenna bus

Top/Port and Starboard antenna mute two IRS buses—second port speed configurable

19 200 kbps (For connection specification, refer to

"Maintenance Port Interface" on page 1-17)

10BASE-T input and output for SCPC (Swift 64 Mobile

ISDN) and MPDS using Point-to-Point Protocol over

Ethernet (PPPoE)

Used for placing PPPoE calls using the MPDS, SCPC,

SBB PS, SBB CS services

Controls BGAN secondary contexts via the side AT handler

Provides status information to the client system using

SNMP

ISDN S/T physical interface supporting up to six external connections to Terminal Adapter (TA) or Terminal

Equipment (TE) devices

One ISDN interface to high-speed data services

POTS tip/ring interface (2)

CEPT-E1

4-Wire interfaces

POTS analog interface provides access to services over

Swift 64 or SBB

Provides priority 4 (public) calls to the cabin over the

Aero H+ service

Providing cockpit voice services through the audio control panel over Aero-H+ services

23-15-30

1-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 1-2 lists the RTCA/DO-160E environmental characteristics for HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminals.

Table 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics

4.5.2

4.5.3

4.5.4

4.5.5

Section Environmental Condition

4 Temperature and Altitude

4.5.1

Ground Survival Low

Short Time Operating Low

Operating Low Temperature

Ground Survival High Temperature

Category/Comment

Short Term Operating High Temperature F2

Operating High Temperature F2

In Flight Loss of Cooling Z—Operate for 30 minutes @40ºC with 10W

Output RF power and 180 minutes @40C without damage and without producing smoke or fire

4.6.1

4.6.2

4.6.3

Altitude Test

Decompression Test

Over Pressure Test

Temperature Variation

Humidity

Operational Shock and Crash Safety

A2—Modified to include an extra test of 4 hours at 10,000 ft.

B—Modified to include an extra test after the

5th cycle

8 Vibration

Explosive Atmosphere

Waterproofness

Fluids Susceptibility

Sand and Dust

Fungus Resistance

Salt Spray

Magnetic Effect

Power Input

S (CURVE B, C)—equipment exposed to 1 hour curve C (unpowered) prior to testing with curve B.

E—Modified to test at 0 ft and 41000 ft.

16.5

Power Input (ac)

16.5.1.1 Normal Operating Conditions

16.5.1.2 Voltage Modulation

16.5.1.3 Frequency Modulation

16.5.1.4 Momentary Power Interruptions

16.5.1.5 Transient/Voltage Surge—Normal

A(WF)H

A(WF)

23-15-30

1-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 1-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Characteristics

Section Environmental Condition

16.5.1.6 Normal Frequency Variation, 360 Hz to

800 Hz

16.5.1.7 DC Content

16.5.1.8 Voltage Distortion

16.5.2.1 Abnormal Operating Condition

16.5.2.2 Abnormal Frequency and Voltage

Condition

Category/Comment

A(WF)

16.5.2.3 Transient/Voltage Surge—Abnormal

16 Power Input (dc)

16.6

Normal Operating Conditions

16.6.1.1 Emergency Operation

16.6.1.1 Ripple Voltage

16.6.1.3 Momentary Power Interruptions

16.6.1.4 Normal Surge Voltage

16.6.2.1 Abnormal Operating Conditions

16.6.2.3 Momentary Undervoltage Operation

16.6.2.4 Abnormal Surge Voltage

16.7.1

Current Harmonic Emissions from

Loads (ac)

Voltage Spike

Audio Frequency Conducted

Susceptibility

A(WF)

A (No damage)

A(WF)H

A—600 V, and repeated at 1000 V

Power Input (115 V ac)

Power Input (28 V dc)

Induced Signal Susceptibility (ac)

Induced Signal Susceptibility (dc)

Radio Frequency Susceptibility

Emission of RF Energy

Lightning Induced Transient

Susceptibility

Lightning Direct Effects

Icing

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

Fire Flammability

K(NF)

A3J33

A —Modified to apply 4kV to all connector pins connecting to other equipment

C—Modified to include compliance with 14

CFR (FAR) 25.853a and 25.869(a) including amendment 25-72

23-15-30

1-9

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

4. System Interfaces

This section briefly describes the external HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal system interfaces required

to control, monitor, maintain, and supplement the terminal. "Installation" on page 3-1 provides

a detailed description of interface connections.

Figure 1-3 shows the system interfaces of the HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminal.

Figure 1-3 HSD-440Stand-Alone Terminal Interfaces

A. Central Maintenance Computer (CMC)

The CMC can include a video display system and keyboard or it can interface with a separate multi-purpose control display system, such as an MCDU. The HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal supports CMC interfaces defined in ARINC 741 Part 1 Appendix 1, with minor customization as required.

The CMC receives BITE data using the standard ARINC 429 maintenance words from all subsystems attached to it. In turn, the CMC broadcasts data, such as time, date, flight number, flight phase, and aircraft ID, that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals attached to it can use to log events.

The CMC enables you to query the equipment attached to it for BITE data and control the systems attached to it.

23-15-30

1-10

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

For more information about using the CMC, refer to the CMC manufacturer’s documentation.

B. Source Destination Identification (SDI)

The SDI is strapped to indicate the installation type.

C. FWD IDs, ICAO IDs, and IMSI

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses two 24-bit IDs called Forward/Return Link Pairs

(FRLPs) for the Swift 64 service: a Forward ID (FWD ID) and a Return ID (RTN ID). The

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal reads the FWD ID from the EEPROM and performs a look-up for the RTN ID. The terminal obtains the second FRLP from the table based on the first

FRLP. For security reasons, each assembly contains an encrypted look-up table with the whole addressing space assigned to the product by Inmarsat. To minimize the risk of unauthorized use of its contents, the table is not accessible to the user.

The ISN consists of the type approval number and the FWD ID address. Each FRLP is associated with Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs), which are the numbers that a user dials from the ground to reach a terminal on an aircraft. There is a unique IMN for each of the service types (for example, data or voice).

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides IMEI and IMSI for SBB. The IMEI identifies the equipment type to the network . The equipment types identity is hard coded in the equipment. The IMSI identifies the subscriber. This identity is contained within the USIM housed in the SCM.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides two ways to define the ICAO ID—by strapping or over the secondary IRS bus. You can select strapping or the IRS bus as the source of the ICAO ID by the secure ORT parameter ICAO CODE SOURCE.

NOTE: If the ICAO address source is set to the IRS bus, the secondary IRS type ORT parameter must be set to AES ID.

The 24-bit ICAO ID forms part of the Inmarsat Serial Number (ISN).

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) number for access to SBB services. The IMSI is stored in the terminal’s SIM card, and is printed on the SCM. Register your IMSI with your service provider to begin using SBB services.

D. Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) Pin Wiring

WOW discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground or in the air, and are used for flight data-logging purposes. Since data that the aircraft is airborne is supplied to the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal by other equipment, this information from the discretes is not required. However, EMS Aviation recommends wiring the WOW discretes if you plan to load software while the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is installed in the aircraft.

WOW is only used to determine aircraft on-ground status if the Inertial Reference System

(IRS) has no valid data, and the CMC is not installed, or if the CMC is not providing valid data.

Note 40 of the ARINC 741 specification documentation defines the requirement for WOW data.

23-15-30

1-11

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

E. IRS ARINC 429 Interface

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports two IRS inputs and three types of labels:

• Inertial

• GNSS

• Hybrid

Table 1-3, Table 1-4, and Table 1-5 list the labels for both primary and secondary IRS

inputs.

NOTE: The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not process the equipment ID label.

Label Type

Latitude

Longitude

Priority

N/A

Ground speed N/A

Table 1-3 Inertial Type Labels

Name

AIRCRAFT_LATITUDE

AIRCRAFT_LONGITUDE

AIRCRAFT_GROUND_SPEED

True track

True heading

N/A

AIRCRAFT_TRUE_TRAK

AIRCRAFT_HEADING

Pitch angle

Roll angle

Altitude

Other

N/A

AIRCRAFT_PITCH

AIRCRAFT_ROLL

AIRCRAFT_ALTITUDE

EQUIPMENT_ID

313

314

324

325

Label

310

311

312

361

377

Label Type

Latitude

Longitude

Priority

N/A

Ground speed N/A

Table 1-4 GNSS Type Labels

Name

GNSS_LATITUDE

GNSS_LONGITUDE

GNSS_GROUND_SPEED

True track

Altitude

N/A

GNSS_TRUE_TRAK

GNSS_ALTITUDE_370

Other

N/A

GNSS_ALTITUDE_76

GNSS_SENSOR_STATUS_WORD

HDOP_WORD

EQUIPMENT_ID

103

370

273

Label

110

111

112

101

377

23-15-30

1-12

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Label Type

Latitude

Longitude

Ground speed 1

True track

True heading

Pitch angle

Roll angle

Altitude

Other

Priority

Table 1-5 Hybrid Type Labels

Name

HYBRID_LATITUDE

GNSS_LATITUDE

N/A

HYBRID_LONGITUDE

GNSS_LONGITUDE

HYBRID_GROUND_SPEED

GNSS_GROUND_SPEED

HYBRID_TRUE_TRAK

GNSS_TRUE_TRAK

HYBRID_HEADING_132

AIRCRAFT_HEADING

AIRCRAFT_PITCH

AIRCRAFT_ROLL

HYBRID_ALTITUDE_261

GNSS_ALTITUDE_76

HDOP_WORD

GNSS_SENSOR_STATUS_WORD

EQUIPMENT_ID

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the navigation data according to the following priority rules:

• For all labels other than Altitude, hybrid labels have the highest priority, followed by

GNSS and inertial labels.

• For Altitude labels, the highest priority label is 370, followed by 261, 75, and 361.

• If both buses have the same label and label type, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal control processor uses the 429 bus source of one of the labels as long as the label is present and valid.

The secondary IRS port set to AES ID mode provides the ICAO ID. Table 1-6 lists the

AES ID type labels.

325

261

101

103

132

314

324

273

377

111

175

112

137

Label

254

110

255

23-15-30

1-13

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 1-6 AES ID Type Labels

Name Label

ICAO Part 1

ICAO Part 2

275

276

Antenna Interface

The HSD-440 Mark 2 terminal interfaces to any mechanically-steered, conformal-array, or phased-array antenna subsystems that are compatible with ARINC 741 and 781. The antenna-pointing commands and status messages are communicated between the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and antenna subsystem over ARINC 429, multi-control, top/port and/or starboard BITE and HPA mute buses, as defined in ARINC 741, Part 1.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support high gain antennas.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals do not support the third MCDU when a side-mount antenna is installed.

G. CMU

Each HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can be connected to up to two ARINC 724B/758 CMUs.

A CMU is a general purpose instrument used to create and direct low data rate messages to different ground-based systems, including airline headquarters and operations. The

CMU also provides access to Aero H/H+ PRT channels.

The CMUs operate in two modes: it can select from a number of Satellite Service

Providers rather than Inmarsat only, or it can operate with no preferred Satellite Service

Provider.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal exchanges information with the CMU over ARINC 429 interfaces. The default speed is low, but you can set the speed of the buses to high through the ORT.

H. Antenna Subsystem RF Interface

The system RF parameters, such as cable losses and antenna gain, are delimited to make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performance requirements are met. Refer

to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a definition of these parameters and their expected values.

5. User Interfaces

This section describes the HSD-440 interfaces that enable users to access Inmarsat services and monitor the operation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

A. MCDU

The MCDU is a device that uses an ARINC 429 interface per ARINC 739, which lets you communicate with individual instruments on an aircraft, including the Flight Management

System (FMS), very high frequency (VHF) radio, and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can make air-to-air and air-to-ground voice calls with the MCDU. You can also use the

MCDU to answer ground-to-air and air-to-air voice calls.

23-15-30

1-14

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports three MCDUs.

B. WSC

The WSC is a device that uses an ARINC 429 interface per ARINC 741 Part 2 Attachment

2F-42.1, which provides display functions similar to the MCDU. For more information about the WSC, see the WSC manufacturer’s documentation and ARINC 741 Part 2

Attachment 2F-42.1.

C. Remote Reset

The remote reset output provides an external reset function for the complete HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal. Pressing the momentary normally open (NO) switch resets the system's processor-card circuitry.

The remote reset has the same function as pressing the test button on the front panel of the terminal.

D. ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals connect to a variety of interface options. The physical interface for ISDN BRI service is EURO S/T, which supports several types of connections to user equipment.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide one ISDN S/T bus interface which is capable of hosting up to six external physical connections to EURO ISDN devices.

The ISDN BRI S/T bus accesses only the Swift 64/SBB channel card. In SBB mode, the interface provides one SBB circuit-switched connection. In Swift 64 mode, the interface provides two Swift 64 circuit-switched connections. If the channel is busy or in-call, the request for service is denied.

23-15-30

1-15

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 1-4 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ISDN Connections

You can install RJ45 interface connectors in the cabin area to facilitate connection to the

ISDN interface. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a description of the RJ45 connector

and cable termination.

E. Ethernet Data Interfaces

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide two Ethernet data interfaces. Each Ethernet port provides a 10 Mbps access with a 10BASE-T physical interface. The HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal data I/O controller takes the PPP data stream and directs it to the required port on the channel card, depending on the type of service selected by the user. PPPoE is required on the user equipment to allow the establishment of virtual connections to either service. You can use the Ethernet ports for either Mobile ISDN or MPDS service when operating in Swift 64 mode, or PS (background or streaming) or CS (Mobile ISDN) when operating in SBB mode

The Ethernet interface also provides access to equipment monitoring functions through

SNMP, and to the side AT handler for control of secondary contexts in SBB

POTS Tip/Ring Interfaces

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal includes two POTS analog interfaces that connect to the

Swift 64/SBB channel card. The default setting for POTS port 1 is 64 kbps Speech, and the default setting for POTS port 2 is 3.1 kbps Audio, which is appropriate for fax calls.

23-15-30

1-16

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

G. CEPT-E1 Interface

The CEPT-E1 interface provides access to a maximum of two calls through Aero H+ voice services.

The CEPT-E1 interface connects to standard ITU or ARINC 746-compliant equipment.

Users can select the equipment through an ORT parameter.

H. Maintenance Port Interface

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is equipped with a maintenance port, located on the front panel of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, with remote access also available through the rear ARINC 600 connector. If the ports on both the front and back panels are connected, the front-panel connection has priority and the back-panel connection does not function.

The maintenance port provides the physical connection to a password-protected MPU that provides a system interface for users or service personnel who need to upgrade, monitor, or troubleshoot the system.

The user connects to the maintenance port either through the maintenance 25-pin socket

D-Sub (DB25) connector on the front panel of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal or through a remote 9-pin socket D-Sub (DE9) connector via the ARINC 600 connector, as described

in "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.

A standard VT100 compatible terminal or computer (PC/laptop) running an emulator program such as HyperTerminal©, ProComm (PCPLUS)©, or another serial communication package provides the user interface to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MPU. Configure the connection as follows:

• Bits per second—19200

• Data bits—8

• Parity—none

• Stop bits—1

• Flow control—none

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supports two different end user access levels within the maintenance port architecture: End User and Field Representative.

(1) End User Access: Level 1

Password: menu

This limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel.

(2) Field Representative Access: Level 2

Password: maint

This level is for trained installers and product support personnel. This access level supports read and limited write capabilities. Users are able to disable/mask/clear faults, change satellite or LES/GES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and perform other maintenance or upgrade functions.

23-15-30

1-17

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

"Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 provides a detailed description of the two

levels of user access and the menus, report selections, functions, and system diagnostic procedures of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.

Fault Indicator LED

Table 1-7 provides a description of the fault indicator LED functions.

LED

Signal

LED1

LED2

Table 1-7 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal LED Output Designations

Label Color Indication Description

Power On Green

Fault Red

Normal operation: on.

HPA output is greater than 30dBm: flashes at 1 Hz.

Power on: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal supply voltage is active. Self-test: flashes at 1 Hz alternately with the Fault

LED.

Fault: Fault condition as described in "Fault Indicator LED" on page 1-18.

Self-test: flashes once per second alternately with the Power

On LED.

A failure in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal may be due to a number of fault conditions.

When fault condition is detected, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal activates a red, Fault

LED. Some of the potential fault conditions are:

• CP RAM

• CP Application code CRC

• CC power up

• CP D-UART

• CP ARINC Chipset

• PSU Power rail

• Previous Power Up CP RAM

• PSU Over temperature

• OCXO Warmup

• PA Over Current

• PA Voltage Driver

• PA Over temperature shutdown

• PA 12VDC STATUS DISCRETE

• SDU Configuration Module

• CP Boot Code CRC

• DIO Boot

23-15-30

1-18

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• VP RAM

• VP Application Code CRC

• VP Kernel

• VP 4-Wire or POTS COM

• VP 4-Wire #1

• VP 4-wire #2

Self-Test

The self-test button activates the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal self-test.

The self-test button resets the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performs a POST when the self-test button is pressed for over ten seconds.

K. Remote Status Panel (Optional)

In HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminals, the outputs to the optional remote status panel provide a visual indication of the operational status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal— they mirror the front panel LEDs labeled as Power (LED1) and Fault (LED2). Refer to

"Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed installation and circuit requirements.

6. Software Description

This section describes the software specifications and operational software components of

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.

A. Software Specifications

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal software meets the following DO-178B standards:

• SBB to Level E

• Swift 64 to Level

• Classic Aero voice and data to Level D

B. Operational Software Part Numbers

Table 1-8 provides a list of software part numbers for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.

1252-A-3800-01

Table 1-8 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Operational Software

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal Part Number

EMS Aviation Part

Number

LI-1252-38015 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal firmware assembly

Description

23-15-30

1-19

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

C. Owner Requirements Table (ORT)

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal includes an ORT that stores information relevant to the operation of the terminal. The ORT is divided into two parts: secure and user. The secured partition contains those items that are installation-dependent and crucial to the proper operation of the satellite communication system. End users cannot modify these parameters.

The user partition includes items that aircraft operators can modify, such as 4-wire headset speaker volume.

You can use the EMS ORT Application to change ORT parameters and to create ORT files on your computer. You can then load the ORT file to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through TFTP on an Ethernet connection. You can load the same ORT file to various

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals in your fleet. Section "2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application" on page 6-32 provides more information about the EMS ORT

Application.

23-15-30

1-20

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

SYSTEM OPERATION

This section provides basic information on registering and operating HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, including the following sections:

•

Registering and Activating Terminals

•

Configuring Terminals

•

Using Terminals

1. Registering and Activating Terminals

Registering and activating HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals has the following steps:

•

Preparing Terminal Information

•

Obtaining ICAO Addresses

•

Choosing Service Providers

•

Registering Terminals

A. Preparing Terminal Information

Before installing the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, obtain an ISN and identify the Swift 64 terminal type and service category.

(1) Obtaining ISNs

Honeywell provides ISNs for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal based on the intended installation configuration. The last six digits of the ISN form the Forward ID.

When requesting ISNs, have the following information available:

• End customer name, including contact information

• The part number of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Tail registration number, aircraft type, and serial number of the aircraft on which the terminal is being installed

• Serial number of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals

• Intended installation configuration mode

(2) Identifying the Swift 64 Service Category and Terminal Type

Inmarsat divides the band of frequencies assigned to Swift 64 high-speed data into two separate categories: Category A and Category B. Category B frequencies are restricted to those that do not overlap with Aero H/H+ frequency allocations. HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminals do not require restricted frequency allocations. Register HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminals as Category A systems.

23-15-30

2-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The Swift 64 terminal type for all modes of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals is 76HW07.

Currently, supported service types for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals operating Swift 64 are:

• 64 kbps speech

• 3.1 kHz audio

• 56 kbps data

• 64 kbps UDI

• AMBE voice

• MPDS

B. Obtaining ICAO Addresses

Obtain your ICAO address from your local aeronautical authority. Your service provider will require this address when you register.

C. Choosing Service Providers

Contact Inmarsat for an up-to-date list of Inmarsat Service Providers using the following contact information:

Inmarsat

99 City Road, London

EC1Y 1AX

Tel: +44 20 7728 1000

Fax: +44 20 728 1044

Customer Care

Tel: +44 20 7728 1777

Fax: +44 20 7728 1142

Email: [email protected]

Web address: www.inmarsat.com

D. Registering Terminals

Contact your Inmarsat service provider and ask for a registration for service activation of

Aircraft Earth Station form. With this form, you can register for Swift 64, SBB, and Aero H+ services. The services available depend on your service provider.

To complete the registration form you need the following information:

• Customer information (address and contact information)

• Service provider details (obtained from your ISP)

• System and terminal information (terminal type, manufacturer, model number, serial number of terminal)

• ICAO 24 bit technical address for Aero H+ services

• ISN for Swift 64 services

• IMEI and IMSI (printed on the SCM label) for SBB services

23-15-30

2-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Aircraft information (tail number, fuselage/airframe number, manufacturer and model, and country of registration)

• List of services required (for example, Swift 64 Mobile ISDN, Aero H+ data-2, SBB

PS and SBB CS services)

NOTE: When requesting a logon class, you must request Class 3, even if your installation does not support data services. The channel card software does not support

Class 2.

2. Configuring Terminals

This section provides basic information on how to configure HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals for operation with user devices.

A. Setting up Airborne Networks

For information about setting up airborne networks that use Swift 64 and SBB services, refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.

B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support connection to a multitude of user devices, allowing the user to customize their system. The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide,

MN-1252-13005, provides more information about ISDN devices and services.

C. IMNs

IMNs are unique routing numbers that act similarly to telephone numbers. IMNs are assigned by Inmarsat to each service type (64 kbps Speech, 3.1 kHz Audio, 56 kbps data, and 64 kbps data).

When registering your system, request IMNs for each service-type device attached to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal on the Service Activation form. Although the service provider may support an unlimited number of IMNs assigned to a particular system, the number of physical connections available on a system defines the number of IMNs supported.

NOTE: To get assigned extra or multiple IMNs per service type, you must request them from your service provider when filling out your service registration and application form.

The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information about IMNs.

D. MSNs

MSNs act as identification and routing codes for user devices attached to the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal ISDN bus. MSNs identify the device on the system so that incoming calls route to the appropriate device. Each device must be assigned an appropriate MSN to identify to the Inmarsat system what type of service that device needs on outgoing calls. The MSNs also provide routing information for incoming calls.

The HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005, provides more information about MSNs.

23-15-30

2-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

E. Configuring User ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)

You can use the MPU to configure user-level parameters in the ORT. This feature will be available in a future release.

Configuring Secure ORT Parameters with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)

You can use the MPU to configure secure-level parameters in the ORT.

The Forward ID is a secure ORT parameter that you must configure in order to use

Swift 64 services. Refer to section "K: Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters" on page 6-15.

G. Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU)

can use the MPU to configure the ORT. Refer to "Configuring the Owners Requirements

Table (ORT)" on page 6-1 for instructions.

H. Understanding CMU Messages

The CMU communicates with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using two types of ARINC

429 messages: Broadcast messages and Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) messages. Both types of communication are supported at the same time.

Appendix F: “CMU Messages” on page F-1 includes descriptions of the messages that

the CMU will transmit to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and receive from the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal.

Configuring Swift 64 LES Access Codes

This section describes how to configure the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal with the LES

Access Codes provided by your Inmarsat service provider to support Swift 64 service.

Configure LES access codes only if you plan to use Swift 64 services. This configuration is not required for SBB or classic services.

NOTE: You can remove the label that covers the LES Access Codes LEDs once you have configured the LES Access Codes.

(1) General Overview

ISPs operate LESs. The ISPs are typically public telephone companies of the country where the LES is located.

Using satellite communications antennas and up-and-downlink communications equipment, the LES converts the space segment to a format compatible with public and private telephone and data networks. Each satellite is associated with a number of LESs that fall within its coverage.

Inmarsat assigns each LES an access code. These access codes are used by the

Inmarsat system to route calls to the correct OR satellite and LES.

NOTE: HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are shipped with the factory default LES Access

Codes set to 0 (zero). All HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals must be configured with the valid LES Access Codes provided by your ISP.

23-15-30

2-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(2) Changing Default LESs Using the MPU

The LES Access Codes can be configured using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.

You can access the MPU by connecting a computer running a VT100 terminal emulation program to the RS-232 maintenance port on the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminals. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for connection settings

and cabling information).

NOTE: When configuring the LES Access Codes using the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal MPU, the application requests the input of a Secondary LES

Access Code. At the time of writing, Inmarsat has not implemented the recognition of the secondary LES value in their systems. However, a valid

Secondary LES Access Code must be entered in the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal. The Secondary LES Access Code must be the same as the

Primary LES Access Code.

Inmarsat usually provides LES Access Codes for the ISPs providing Swift 64 services. Contact Inmarsat directly for an up to date list of LES and Swift 64 service providers.

For more information, visit Inmarsat's Web site at www.inmarsat.com

or contact their

Customer Care Service at:

Telephone: +44 20 7728 1777

Fax: +44 20 7728 1142

E-mail: [email protected]

Table 2-1 Inmarsat Swift 64 LES Operator and Access Codes

Land Earth Station Operator Country

AOR-E AOR-W IOR

Telenor Satellite Services Inc.

Stratos

Stratos (Auckland LES)

Xantic (Burum LES)

Xantic (Perth LES)

USA

UK/Canada

New Zealand

Netherlands

Australia

001

002

012

001

002

012

001

002

012

POR

001

002

012

(a) Equipment Required

You need the following to change the default LES Access Code in an HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal:

• Computer

• Terminal emulation program (e.g., HyperTerminal)

23-15-30

2-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(b) Connecting to the Maintenance Port

To connect to the maintenance port:

• Connect a computer running a terminal emulation program to the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port, and then power up the system. (Refer

to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for detailed connection

information.)

To change all of the LES Access Codes simultaneously to the same LES Access

Code:

1. Connect to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port.

2. Type the password maint .

3. To navigate to Menu 3, press CTRL + N.

4. In Menu 3, press i .

5. Follow the application prompts, and enter the LES Access Code.

The Menu 3, option i configures the Primary and Secondary LES Access Codes for all of the ORs to the same LES Access Code.

NOTE: In cases where the Service Provider requires different LES Access

Codes for different ORs, each LES Access Code must be programmed individually using Menu 3, item P.

(d) Changing LES Access Codes on a Call-by-Call Basis

To change the LES Access Code on a call-by-call basis:

• Dial the 901 prefix before your dial sequence:

901 + LES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code +

Telephone Number + POUND KEY

Example: 901 + 012 + 00 + 1+ 613+5551212 + #

NOTE: The call connects only if the service is authorized by the LES. To obtain LES codes, call your Swift 64 service provider.

Removing the LED Label

A label covers the LES Access Codes LEDs. You can remove this label once you have configured the LES Access Codes.

K. Activating Configurations

After you configure the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal parameters, you must rest the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using one of the following methods:

• In Menu 2, press z

• Cycle the power to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

When the reset or restart is completed, the configuration values and parameters are activated.

23-15-30

2-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

L. Verifying Configurations

This section describes how to view the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal configuration parameters.

To view the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT system configuration:

1. In Menu 3, press o .

The List ORT appears.

2. To scroll through the listing until you see a table of ORT ORs, press o .

The LES Access Codes are listed in this table.

3. Using Terminals

This section describes how to perform the following tasks:

•

Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls

•

Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface

•

Using Data Connections

•

Operating the MCDU

•

Operating the WSC

•

Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDU

A. Placing Swift 64 Voice, SwiftBroadband, and Fax Calls

Placing voice and fax calls using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is similar to placing an international telephone call or entering a telephone number for dial-up networking data calls. Like international telephone numbers, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

dialing-number-sequence includes different routing components or codes. Figure 2-1

illustrates the required order of the dialing components.

Figure 2-1 Dialing-Sequence Components

23-15-30

2-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Each dialing sequence component serves a different routing function:

• Dial Code Prefix:

Use service-specific dial code prefixes when sending a fax or using analog modems, or for overriding system defaults to force the system to request a specific service

type. Figure 2-1 uses the dial code prefix for 3.1 KHz audio service type (*82*). See

Table 2-2 for other dial code prefixes.

• International Access Code:

The international access code for all airborne equipment is 00.

• Country Code:

Use the Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) number assigned to the country of your call destination.

• Area Code (and City Code, if applicable):

Use the PSTN routing number assigned to the area (and if applicable, city) of your call destination.

• POUND SIGN (#):

To signal the system to send the call, at the end of the telephone dial string, press or enter POUND SIGN (#). Certain devices using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal may not have the function to insert the POUND SIGN (#) at the end of the dialing sequence. For those devices, additional dial code prefixes are required to override

the send command requirement. Refer to Table 2-3 for more information.

(1) Dial Code Prefixes

Although the system automatically selects the appropriate service types on outgoing calls for ISDN devices, a dial code prefix is required to send a fax, identify an analogue modem, or force the system to override the system defaults to select a specific service

type (see Table 2-2).

Table 2-2 Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection

Service Type Service Description

Dial Code Prefix

(Forces service selection)

Swift 64 Prefixes

Speech 64 kbps High-speed voice

3.1 kHz audio

56 kbps data

64 kbps data

Fax, analogue modem, STU-III, STE

High-speed data

*81* or none

*82*

*85*

*84*

23-15-30

2-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 2-2 Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection (Continued)

Service Type Service Description

Dial Code Prefix

(Forces service selection)

SBB Prefixes

Speech 64 kbps

3.1 kHz audio

56 kbps data

64 kbps data

Speech

(AMBE+2)

Fax, analogue modem, STU-III, STE

High-speed data

N/A

*82* or none

*83*

*84*

*80* or none

The system requires the dial code prefix *82* for sending faxes or when using analogue modems. It forces the system to request the required 3.1 kHz audio service from the Inmarsat Satellite Communications Network. If required, use the dial code prefixes to override the system defaults for selecting specific service types. Dial code prefixes for all service types require an asterisk (*) before and after the code number.

Other dial code prefixes provide system overrides required if you are using devices that cannot add a POUND SIGN (#) to the dialing string or devices that are slow

dialing. Table 2-2 provides a description of the additional dial code prefixes used for

system overrides. Table 2-1 provides a list of the LESs and their associated codes.

23-15-30

2-9

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal codes)

Table 2-3 Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides

Reason for Override

Dial Code

Prefix

Example Dialing Sequence

Use this dial code prefix to override the default

LES/GES configured in the system.

This dial code prefix signals the system to override the default LES/GES and use the

selected LES/GES instead. (See Figure 2-2

or contact Inmarsat for Swift 64 LES/GES

Use with fast (e.g. automated) dialing devices that cannot produce or add a POUND SIGN to end the dialing sequence.

This dial code prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input when the POUND SIGN cannot be entered (about 4 seconds).

901 +

LES/GES

CODE

901 + LES/GES CODE +

International Code + Country Code +

Area Code + Telephone Number +

POUND KEY

901 + 002 + 00 + 1+ 613 +5551212

+ POUND KEY

902

902 + International Code + Country

Code + Area Code + Telephone

Number

902 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212

Use with slow (e.g. manual) dialing devices that cannot produce or add a POUND SIGN to end the dialing sequence.

This dial code prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input (about 20 seconds).

903

903 + International Code + Country

Code + Area Code + Telephone

Number

903 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212

(2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal provides a two-way link for aircraft-to-aircraft communication. Calling aircraft-to-aircraft requires additional information. You need to know the IMN of the device or service on the aircraft you are calling.

Figure 2-2 illustrates the Mobile-to-Mobile dialing sequence.

Figure 2-2 Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence

23-15-30

2-10

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

B. Placing Calls with the CEPT-E1 Interface

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal CEPT-E1 interface provides Cabin Telecommunication Unit

(CTU) access to two Aero-H+ 4800 bps AMBE voice calls simultaneously. Since the

CEPT-E1 interface shares the Aero H+ voice channels with the cockpit, CTU calls maybe preempted from either the air or ground by higher priority calls.

Air-to-ground and ground-to-air calls over the CEPT-E1 interface are priority 4 (public) calls.

For information on how to place a call over the CEPT-E1 interface, see the CTU documentation.

C. Using Data Connections

For information about data connections, optimizing your airborne network and selecting the service that best meets your needs, refer to the HSD High-speed Data Terminal

Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.

D. Operating the MCDU

This section provides information about the MCDU and its interfaces—output and input ports, the screen, and the keyboard.

(1) Output Ports

The MCDU transfers its identification and commands to the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal using 32 bit words and a 12-14.5 kbps output port, as defined in ARINC

Specification 429, Digital Information Transfer System (DITS).

(2) Input Ports

The MCDU receives identification information and displays data from individual subsystems using seven input ports, as defined by ARINC Specification 429. Ports

1 and 2 are reserved for FMSs, and they operate at 100 kbps. Ports 3 to 7 are available for the MCDU to communicate with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, and they operate at 12-14.5 kbps.

(3) Screen

The MCDU displays all data on the screen, as shown in Figure 2-3.

23-15-30

2-11

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

1 S A T C O M M A I N M E N U

1L 3

S A T 1 A V A I L A B L E

2L 5 * M A K E C A L L

3L 7

0 0 1 6 1 3 5 6 0 1 2 4 3

P R I

3 2R

S A T 2 I N C O M I N G C A L L

4L 9 * A N S WE R C A L L R E J E C T *

P U B L I C

5L 11

E 5R

6L 13 < S U B M E N U D I R E C T O R Y > 6R

Figure 2-3 MCDU Screen

The top of the screen displays the title of the menu on the screen. The bottom of the screen (Line 14) is the scratchpad that displays information that you enter on the keyboard.

The MCDU has six buttons on each side of the screen that activate MCDU functions.

Figure 2-3 displays these buttons on the left and right sides of the screen. When the

functions corresponding to a button are available, the function’s name appears

beside the button—for example, in Figure 2-3, ANSWER CALL and REJECT (a call)

are available functions for the incoming call on SAT 2.

Other lines on the MCDU screen display information relevant to the function or status

of the HSD-440. In Figure 2-3, line 6 displays the phone number the HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal will dial when the user presses the MAKE CALL button, and the number

3 under PRI in row 5 indicates that the priority of the outgoing call is 3.

(4) Keyboard

The MCDU’s keyboard includes a set of numeric keys and a set of alphabetic keys, both of which you can use to enter data into the MCDU.

The keyboard may include preset keys, such as the following:

• The IDX or MAIN MENU key: this key returns you to the MCDU’s main menu.

• The CLR key: this key clears any text you type into the scratchpad.

• The NEXT PAGE key: this key brings up the next page of a menu if one is available.

(5) Special Symbols

Because of space constraints on the screen, the MCDU uses a number of special symbols to indicate actions:

• < and > appear at the far left or right to indicate that another menu page is available in that direction.

23-15-30

2-12

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• * appears at the far left or right to indicate that pressing that key results in an action.

• NUMBER/NUMBER appears to tell you which page out of how many pages you are viewing. For example, 1/3 would appear when you are on page 1 of 3 pages in total.

• [ and ] appear around empty data fields where you can enter data. However, entering data is not mandatory in these fields.

(6) Navigating the MCDU

The MCDU includes a number of menus, as shown in Figure 2-4. There are four

category pages in the address book and up to 25 pages (100 phone numbers) for each category.

NOTE: The SATCOM CH 2 STAT menu is not present when the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal is operating in SBB mode.

Figure 2-4 MCDU Menus

23-15-30

2-13

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

This section will help you perform the following tasks:

•

Viewing Flight Information

• Logging On and Off

•

Viewing Channel Information

•

Configuring Headsets

(7) Viewing Flight Information

You can view the flight identification from the MCDU.

To view flight information:

1. On the first page of the MCDU’s main menu, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

S A T C O M S U B M E N U

L O G - O N S T A T E

L O G G E D - O F F

< L O G - O N

A E R O C H A N N E L

S T A T U S >

H S D C H A N N E L

S T A T U S >

F L T

1 2 3 4 5

I D

M A I N T E N A N C E >

R E T U R N >

You can view the following information from this screen:

• Flight identification on the line below FLT ID

(8) Logging On and Off

You can use the MCDU to initiate a manual or automatic logon from the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal to the satellite network.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boot-up logon mode is specified in the

Logon/Handover Policy in the ORT. You can set this parameter to automatic or manual. After the terminal has finished the boot-up process, you can use the MCDU to log off (from an automatic logon) or to initiate a manual (constrained) logon.

During an automatic logon, the system selects the most appropriate GES depending on HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal location.

During a manual logon, you must select the GES. Even if the ORT parameter is configured for automatic logon, you can still constrain the terminal to logon using a particular GES.

23-15-30

2-14

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(a) Viewing the Log Status

The log status defines whether the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is currently logged on or logged off. The logon status can be:

• Logged-Off—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off.

• Logged-Off Inop—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is configured to log on manually but the terminal is in an inoperable state. Clear all problems for the logon to continue.

• Logged-Off Rejected—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on and a second logon attempt is made. The second attempt fails and the status is Logged-Off Rejected.

• Logging-On Inop—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is configured to log on automatically but the terminal is in an inoperable state. Clear all problems for the logon to continue.

• Logged-On Constrained—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on manually.

• Logged-On Auto—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on automatically.

• Logging-off—TheHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is in the process of logging off.

• Logging-on—The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is in the process of logging on.

To view the log status:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

The logon state appears on the line below LOG-ON STATE.

You can view additional details about the logon, including the GES and satellite name. To view additional logon details:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON .

The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON screen appears as shown below. The logon state appears on the line below LOG-ON STATE. You can also view the GES name, satellite name, signal level, antenna type, azimuth and elevation, and

8-digit ICAO ID.

NOTE: If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off, the LOG-OFF option is not available. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on, the

AUTO LOG-ON option is not available.

(b) Initiating an Automatic Logon

When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs on automatically, it selects an appropriate GES and satellite based on its position.

23-15-30

2-15

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To log on automatically:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON .

The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page appears.

3. On the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page, press the key next to AUTO

LOG-ON .

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs on and the logon state is LOGGED-ON

AUTO.

NOTE: The AUTO LOG-ON key is not available if the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal is already logged on.

You can constrain the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to logon using a particular GES.

If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged off, selecting a GES initiates a constrained log on (logon state is LOGGED-ON CONSTRAINED).

If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is already logged on and you select a new GES, the MCDU displays the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page and automatically logs off the old GES and logs on to the new GES. This also results in a constrained logon.

To select a GES:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to LOG-ON .

The SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page appears.

3. On the SATCOM AERO LOG-ON page, press the key next to GES SEL .

The GES SELECTION page appears.

23-15-30

2-16

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

G E S S E L E C T I O N

A O R W

* A U S S A G U E L / 0 0 5

A O R W

* E I K

A O R E

* A U S S A G U E L

/ 0 0 2

/ 1 0 3

A O R E

* E I K

P O R

* P E R T H

/ 1 0 4

/ 2 0 5

1 / 3

R E T U R N >

4. To select a GES, press the button next to the GES name.

A logon confirmation (LOG-ON) appears at the bottom of the screen.

5. To log on to the new GES, press the key next to LOG-ON .

(d) Logging Off

You can use the MCDU to initiate the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logoff sequence.

To log off:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. Press the key next to LOG-OFF .

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal logs off.

(9) Viewing Channel Information

There are three Aero channels and two Swift 64 channels, or one SwiftBroadband channel, available with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can use the MCDU to view the following information about each of the channels:

• Logon status (Aero channels only)—Logon status may be Valid or Invalid.

• ORR status (Swift 64 channels only)—Ocean Region Registration (ORR) status may be Valid or Invalid.

• Attach status (SwiftBroadband channels only)—Attach status may be Valid or

Invalid.

• Call Termination Code (CALL TERM)

• Transmitter Effect Isotropic Radiated Power (TX EIRP)

• Receiver carrier-to-noise ratio (RX C/NO)

• Service type—Possible service types are:

• AERO P/R/T

• AERO VOICE

• SWIFT64

23-15-30

2-17

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• SBB (SwiftBroadband)

• Number of bits transmitted per second (TX KBPS)—for Swift 64 MPDS or SBB background services, the number of bits being transmitted per second is expressed in kilobits per second (kbps).Otherwise, the number of bits transmitted is zero.

• Number of bits received per second (RX KBPS)—for Swift 64 MPDS or SBB background services, the number of bits being received per second is expressed in kilobits per second (kbps). Otherwise, the number of bits received is zero.

• Service information (CONNECTED)—For Aero service, service information includes the GES name and number. For GAN (Swift 64) service, service information includes the service provider number and name description. For SBB service, no information is provided.

• Satellite ID (SAT)—Satellite ID includes the index number of each satellite, a mnemonic and abbreviated alphanumeric description, and the spot beam that theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is currently using.

(a) To view information about an Aero channel:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SUBMENU page, press the key next to AERO CHANNEL STATUS .

The SATCOM AERO STATUS page appears.

S A T C O M A E R O S T A T U S

< C H A N 3 A C A R S D A T A

< C H A N 4 A E R O V O I C E

< C H A N 5 A E R O V O I C E

R E T U R N >

3. On the SATCOM AERO STATUS page, press the key next to a channel.

The SATCOM CH STAT page appears. (MCDU pages for Channel 3 and

Channel 4 are shown below.)

23-15-30

2-18

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

S A T C O M C H 3 S T A T

L O G O N

W A I T F O R P C H A N S Y N C

C A L L T E R M

T X

1 3 . 5

E I R P

R X C / N 0

5 0 . 0

S E R V T Y P E

A E R O P / R / T

T X K B P S

0 . 0 0

R X K B P S

0 . 0 0

C O N N E C T E D

E I K

S A T

A O R E B 5

R E T U R N >

S A T C O M C H 4 S T A T

L O G O N

V A L I D

C A L L T E R M T X

T X

0 . 0

E I R P

K B P S

0 . 0 0

R X K B P S

0 . 0 0

R X C / N 0

0 . 0

S E R V T Y P E

A E R O V O I C E

C O N N E C T E D

E I K

S A T

A O R E B 5

R E T U R N >

(b) To view information about a Swift 64 channel:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to HSD CHANNEL

STATUS .

The SATCOM HSD STATUS page appears.

23-15-30

2-19

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

S A T C O M H S D S T A T U S

< C H A N 1 S W I F T 6 4

< C H A N 2 S W I F T 6 4

R E T U R N >

3. On the SATCOM HSD STATUS page, press the key next to a Swift 64 channel.

The SATCOM CH STAT page appears.

S A T C O M C H 1 S T A T

O R R S T A T

R E G I S T E R I N G

C A L L T E R M T X K B P S

0 . 0 0

T X E I R P

1 4 . 0

R X K B P S

0 . 0 0

R X C / N 0

5 3 . 0

S E R V T Y P E

SW I F T 6 4

C O N N E C T E D

L E S 1

S A T

A O R E B 5

R E T U R N >

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to HSD CHANNEL

STATUS .

The SATCOM HSD STATUS page appears.

23-15-30

2-20

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

S A T C O M H S D S T A T U S

< C H A N 1 S B B

R E T U R N >

3. On the SATCOM HSD STATUS page, press the key next to the SBB channel.

The SATCOM CH STAT page appears.

S A T C O M C H 1 S T A T

A T T A C H

Y E S

C A L L T E R M T X K B P S

0 . 0 0

T X

2 0 . 0

E I R P

R X C / N 0

7 2 . 2

S E R V

B G A N

T Y P E

R X K B P S

0 . 0 0

C O N N E C T E D

S A T

A O R E B 5

R E T U R N >

(10)Viewing Maintenance Information

The maintenance page provides information about:

• Terminal status

• Terminal part numbers

(a) Viewing Terminal Status

To view the terminal status:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE .

The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.

23-15-30

2-21

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

S A T C O M M A I N T E N A N C E

T E R M I N A L

O K

S T A T U S

T R A N S M I T

N O R M A L

< H E A D S E T C O N F I G

< P A R T N U M B E R S

R E S E T S A T C O M S Y S T E M

N O T A V A I L - I N A I R

R E T U R N >

The maintenance menu displays the following information:

• Terminal status on the line below TERMINAL —Terminal status may be

OK or FAULT.

• Transmit status on the line below TRANSMIT— Transmit status may be

NORMAL or INHIBITED.

• Air/Ground status on the line below RESET SATCOM SYSTEM —When set to ON GROUND, the system is on the ground and can be reset.

When set to NOT AVAIL – IN AIR, the system is in the air and cannot be reset.

(b) Viewing Terminal Part Numbers

To view terminal part numbers:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU page appears.

2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE .

The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.

3. On the SATCOM MAINTENACE page, press the key next to PART

NUMBERS .

The SATCOM PART NUMBERS page appears.

The part numbers menu displays the following information:

• HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal part number and version

• HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal software load and version

• 8-digit ICAO ID

• 3-digit HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal serial number

• 6-digit (hexadecimal) Forward IDs (FWD ID 1 and FWD ID 2)

23-15-30

2-22

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• 15-digit IMSI number

(11) Configuring Headsets

To configure the headset(s):

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to SUBMENU .

The SATCOM SUBMENU appears.

2. On the SATCOM SUBMENU page, press the key next to MAINTENANCE .

The SATCOM MAINTENANCE page appears.

3. Press the key next to HEADSET CONFIG.

The SATCOM HEADSET CONFIG page appears.

NOTE: Toggle between the two 4-wire headsets by pressing the key next to

SAT . When you toggle between headsets, the speaker, microphone, sidetone, and noise values are displayed for that headset.

S A T C O M H E A D S E T C O N F I G

* D E F A U L T

* D W N

S P E A K E R

5 0

M I C R O P H O N E

7 0

* D W N

S I D E T O N E

5 0

N O I S E

* D W N - 5 0

S A T

U P *

R E T U R N >

4. To increase or decrease the speaker, microphone, sidetone, and noise insertion levels, press the keys next to DWN and UP . When you change either of the levels, a SAVE label appears at the bottom of the screen.

NOTE: The speaker, microphone, and sidetone values move up and down by

5, and the noise value moves up and down through values -60, -50, -40, and OFF.

NOTE: To reset all the settings to the default values, press the key next to

DEFAULT . Default values are speaker (50), microphone (70), sidetone

(50), and noise (-50).

5. To save the new levels, press the key next to SAVE .

E. Operating the WSC

The WSC performs the same functions as the MCDU. For more information on operating the WSC, see the WSC manufacturer’s documentation and ARINC 741 Part 2

Attachment 2F-42.1.

23-15-30

2-23

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Performing Cockpit Communications with the MCDU

This section provides instructions for making calls with the MCDU and 4-wire voice services available in the aircraft’s cockpit. The cockpit communications system operates with one or two headsets in the aircraft’s cockpit, depending on the operational mode.

(1) Modes of Operation

The cockpit communication services are configured in one of two modes of operation before installation: Latched mode and Push-to-Talk (PTT) mode. These configurations are strapped at the terminal and cannot be changed without removing and rewiring the terminal.

In PTT mode, a telephone number can be dialed only using the MCDU keys, not with the switches on the cockpit communication console. In Latched mode, a call to a telephone number loaded into the MCDU can be initiated using the switches on the

Audio Control Panel (ACP), and calls can be answered and ended with the switches or the MCDU buttons.

(2) Accepting and Making Calls

You can accept and make voice calls using

• the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the MCDU, the ACP, and one or two 4-wire cockpit headsets or

• the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the WSC, the ACP, and one or two 4-wire cockpit headsets.

(a) Automatic Call Handling Priority and Preemption

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal automatically disconnects (preempts) a call if it receives a higher priority call when both classic Aero channels are in use. When two calls are in progress, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the lower priority call. If both calls are the same priority, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the last call received.

When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal preempts the lower priority call and connects the higher priority call, the caller in the aircraft does not receive a notice.

The new, high priority call starts as soon as the HSD-440receives it.

(b) Accepting and Making Calls

You can use the MCDU and ACP to accept calls, make air-to-ground calls, and make air-to-air calls. You can manually dial calls or dial previously saved telephone numbers from the MCDU’s telephone directory.

The way in which you can accept or make calls depends on the mode in which your 4-wire cockpit headset is strapped (PTT mode or Latched mode) and the

Cockpit Outgoing Call Pre-Select ORT parameter. Refer to "Configuring

Outgoing Call Pre-Selection" on page 6-24.

The combination of lights and chimes that alert you to an incoming call depends on the way in which the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Cockpit Call Signalling Mode

ORT parameter is set. Refer to C. “Configuring Cockpit Communication

Parameters” on page 6-5. If you use the alternate output discretes, the call

discrete outputs are driven as per Table 2-4 instead of using lights and chimes.

23-15-30

2-24

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 2-4 Call Discrete Outputs in HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Channel State

Audio Discrete

Digital Audio

System Light

Digital Audio

System Chime

On hook Off

Call initiated/connected 1 Hz flash

Call answered

Incoming call

Steady or 3 Hz flash

1 Hz flash

Off

Single-stroke

Discrete 1

Off

Alternate Discrete

Discrete 2

Off

To accept the call:

• On the first page of the MCDU’s main menu, press the key next to ANSWER

CALL .

• Assert the Place/End switch.

• Assert the VoiceMic On switch.

• In Latched mode, on the ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.

• In PTT mode, on the ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch and press the

PTT switch.

Making calls using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is similar to placing an international telephone call. Air-to-ground telephone numbers include an international access code, country code, and area code.

International access codes and country codes are shown in Appendix G:

“International Access and Country Codes” on page G-1.

To manually dial a call:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY .

The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.

23-15-30

2-25

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

S A T C O M D I R E C T O R Y

C A T E G O R Y 0 1 C A T E G O R Y 0 3 >

< C A T E G O R Y 0 2 C A T E G O R Y 0 4 >

[ M A N U A L D I A L ]

S A T

P R I

R E T U R N >

2. To select a channel, on the SATCOM DIRECTORY page, press the key next to SAT (the channel number).

3. To set the priority for your call using Table 2-5, type the priority number on

the MCDU scratchpad and press the key next to PRI (the priority value).

Call priority

Table 2-5 Priority Codes

Description

Emergency—used for distress or urgent calls

Operational-High—used for Flight Safety communications

Operational-Lo—used for Regularity of Flight, Meteorological or

Administrative communications

Non-Operational—used for Non Safety of Flight or public phone call (cabin) communications

4. To dial the call, type the phone number into the scratchpad and press the key next to MANUAL DIAL .

With Pre-Select Mode disabled, the MCDU Main Menu page appears and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal initiates the call. With Pre-Select Mode enabled, the MCDU Main Menu page appears.

• To start the call with Pre-Select mode enabled, in either Latched or PTT mode, press the key next to MAKE CALL .

• To start the call in PTT mode with Pre-Select mode enabled, on the ACP, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or PLACE/END CALL 2 switch.

or assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch and then press the PTT switch.

• To start the call In Latched mode with Pre-Select mode enabled, on the

ACP, assert the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.

23-15-30

2-26

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(d) Making Calls from the Telephone Directory

You can make voice calls from the numbers you have saved in the MCDU’s telephone directory.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MCDU enables you to keep four separate telephone books for different uses. By default, these books are called Category

01, Category 02, Category 03, and Category 04. You can customize the directory names in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT.

To make a call from the telephone directory:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY .

The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.

S A T C O M D I R E C T O R Y

C A T E G O R Y 0 1 C A T E G O R Y 0 3 >

< C A T E G O R Y 0 2 C A T E G O R Y 0 4 >

[ M A N U A L D I A L ]

S A T

P R I

R E T U R N >

2. To access the phone numbers in a directory, press the key next to the directory name.

The selected directory appears.

C A T E G O R Y 1

M A K E C A L L :

[

0 1 1 6 1 3 5 5 5 1 1 1 1

* 0 1 - L A B E L 1

0 1 1 6 1 3 5 5 5 2 2 2 2

* 0 2 - L A B E L 2

[ ]

]

1 / 1

S A T

P R I

[ ]

* S O R T R E T U R N >

23-15-30

2-27

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

3. To dial or load a telephone number, press the key next to the number.

With Pre-Select mode disabled, the MCDU main menu page appears and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal starts the call.

With Pre-Select mode enabled, the MCDU main menu page appears.

S A T C O M M A I N M E N U

S A T 1 A V A I L A B L E

* M A K E C A L L

0 0 1 6 1 3 5 5 5 1 1 1 1

P R I

S A T 2 I N C O M I N G C A L L

* A N S WE R C A L L R E J E C T *

P U B L I C

< S U B M E N U D I R E C T O R Y >

4. To dial the telephone number with Pre-Select mode enabled:

• In PTT or Latched mode, on the MCDU, press the key next to MAKE

CALL .

• In PTT mode, on the ACP, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or

PLACE/END CALL 2 switch or close the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch, and then press the PTT switch.

• In Latched mode, on the ACP, close the SAT 1 or SAT 2 switch.

(e) Ending Calls

To end the call:

• In PTT or Latched mode, on the MCDU main menu, press the key next to

END CALL .

• In PTT or Latched mode, assert the PLACE/END CALL 1 or

PLACE/END CALL 2 switch.

• In Latched mode, on the ACP, assert the VoiceMic On switch for the active call.

(f) Saving Telephone Numbers in the Telephone Directory

You can save telephone numbers to the MCDU’s telephone directory to use later, and you can dial telephone numbers from the telephone directory.

23-15-30

2-28

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To save telephone numbers to the telephone directory:

1. On the main page of the MCDU, press the key next to DIRECTORY .

The SATCOM DIRECTORY page appears.

2. To view telephone numbers stored in a directory, press the key next to the directory name.

The directory listing appears.

3. Navigate to the page with the last entry in the directory, type the phone number into the scratchpad, and then press the key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen.

The telephone number appears in the brackets.

4. Type the name associated with the telephone number and then press the key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen.

5. Type the priority associated with the telephone number and then press the key next to the empty brackets on the MCDU screen.

6. To save the number, press the key next to SAVE. To cancel the new entry, press the key next to CANCEL .

NOTE: Press the key next to SORT to alphabetically sort the entries in the directory. Entries remain sorted even after the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal is rebooted.

23-15-30

2-29

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

2-30

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

INSTALLATION

This section provides procedures to install HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals on an aircraft, including the following sections:

•

Advisories

•

Pre-Installation Inspection

•

Mechanical Installation

•

Electrical Installation

•

Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test

•

Installation and Engineering Diagrams

1. Advisories

Read the safety advisories in the Introduction section on page INTRO–6 of this manual before

you begin installing the terminal.

2. Pre-Installation Inspection

Inspect all parts before you install any HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, to make sure that no damage occurred during shipping.

A. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment

• Unpack the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals from the shipping containers.

• Verify that the part number displayed on the shipping box and equipment component matches the model and part number ordered. If components are missing from the shipment, contact the supplier or Honeywell Product Support immediately and report the problem.

• Visually inspect the terminal for any shipping damage. If any shipping damage has occurred, contact the shipping carrier immediately and report the problem.

• Check the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal connectors for corrosion and damage. If damage is noted, do not apply power to the terminal. Contact the supplier or

Honeywell Product Support immediately to report the problem.

B. Cabling Notes

Before proceeding with the installation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, read all cabling notes provided on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Interconnection and Contact

Assignment drawings at the end of this section.

23-15-30

3-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(1) Cabling

When installing the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, follow the cabling requirements listed below:

• Maximum recommended length for Ethernet cables is 50 feet.

• LAN cables must meet flammability, TIA/EIA568-A CAT 5, requirements and conform to ARINC 628 specifications.

• Wire size recommendations:

• For +28 V dc HOT (BP2), +28 V dc RTN GND (BP3), 115 V ac COLD (BP7), and Chassis GND (BP8), use 12 AWG

• For 115 V ac HOT (BP1), use 20 AWG

• Unless otherwise specified, for signaling, use 22 AWG

(2) Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations

When installing HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, consider the following coaxial cable loss requirements:

• Transmit cable: maximum loss is 2.5 dB, including DLNA (typically <0.8 dB), as per ARINC 741. In installations that use a high power relay, the high power relay loss must be included.

• Receive cable: minimum loss is 6 dB, maximum loss is 25 dB (including any in-line attenuator), as per ARINC 741.

3. Mechanical Installation

This section contains the information required to plan the physical placement of HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminals. The Outline and Installation diagrams, shown in Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7, illustrate the physical and mechanical specifications of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

In typical aircraft installations, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal assembly fits into standard ARINC,

8-MCU mounting trays.

A. Physical Placement

When selecting a location for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, allow for adequate spacing for the installation while providing reasonable access for servicing. Leave a minimum gap of 0.5 inches between LRUs.

B. Environmental Requirements

The environmental requirements that must be considered during the physical placement of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are based on the RTCA/DO-160E Environmental

Specifications detailed in "System Description" on page 1-1.

The mounting trays offer a number of fan configuration options depending on the physical placement of the LRU in the aircraft.

(1) Heating and Cooling

Refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for a complete listing of the

RTCA/DO-160E Environmental Specifications for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.

23-15-30

3-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

When selecting an installation location for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, consider the heating and cooling requirements listed below:

• Power Dissipation (AC/DC models): 275 Watts nominal, 400 Watts maximum

• Cooling Air: per ARINC 600

• Recommended Flow rate: 88 kg/hr (185 lbs/hr)

• Pressure drop: 5 ±3 mm (0.07 ±0.025 in.) H

(2) Fan Tray Requirements

WARNING: FAILURE TO INSTALL AND CONFIGURE THE FAN TRAY

ASSEMBLY AS INSTRUCTED MAY SERIOUSLY COMPROMISE

THE HSD-440 TERMINAL'S EXTREME TEMPERATURE

OPERATION.

For adequate airflow to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal subassemblies, install plugs

in the fan/tray configuration as illustrated in Figure 3-1. Fan tray assemblies may be

shipped with or without plugs. If required, order additional plugs from your fan tray manufacturer.

Figure 3-1 Fan Tray Plug Configuration (black = installed, white = removed)

23-15-30

3-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

C. Chassis Grounding

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal tray-mounted assemblies must be electrically bonded to the airframe. Make sure that the mating surfaces are free from contaminants such as paints or other non-conductive elements. Where surface preparations are insufficient to ensure a proper bond, EMS Aviation recommends using a short, tin-coated, copper bonding strap of at least 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) in width. The LRU and tray assemblies should provide a low impedance path of <0.2 ohms.

4. Electrical Installation

This section provides electrical installation details for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.

A. Cabling and Connector Requirements

This section provides general electrical installation information on power, ground, shielding requirements, and cabling.

(1) Power Requirements

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can operate from the aircraft’s +28 V dc or 115 V ac,

400 Hz (nominal) power supply. If both power sources are connected, the terminal will use the 115 V ac supply.

(2) Ground Requirements

Improper grounding can lead to ground loops and induced Electromagnetic

Interference (EMI) or Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). When installing an

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, follow standard grounding practices for both chassis and

cabling shields. Refer to "Chassis Grounding" on page 3-4 for chassis and tray

grounding instructions.

(3) Cable Shielding and Termination

The preferred method of cable shield termination is in accordance with NEMA WC

27500:2000 and ARINC 741. ARINC Report 413A—Guidance for Aircraft Electrical

Power Utilization and Transient Protection provides more detailed information in

Attachment 3-2, Wire Shielding and Grounding Requirements and in Appendix 7.

Unless otherwise stated, all cable shields must be connected to the closest aircraft ground at both ends of the cable and on both sides of any production break in the cable. Where applicable, terminate shields with connectors via the backshell or via a pigtail with a suitable termination to the closest aircraft ground.

General aviation cable-routing guidelines apply. See Table 3-1 for detailed

information.

NOTE: Typically, Ethernet and ISDN cables have multiple shields; terminate each shield separately.

23-15-30

3-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 3-1 Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications

Cable Function

Conductor Type

(Typical)

Single

Point

Multiple

Point

Minimum Conductor

Coverage By Shield

Power Lines

Digital Control

Serial Data

Ethernet Data

Single conductor, stranded

Twisted pair, stranded

N/A N/A

Yes

N/A

85%

ISDN Data

Discrete Lines

Twisted pair, stranded

Single conductor, stranded N/A

Yes

N/A

85%

N/A

RF TX and RX Coaxial Yes 95%

Single Point: Cable shield terminated at one end only via a connector or suitable crimp terminal.

Multiple Point: Cable shield terminated at both ends via a connector or suitable crimp terminal, usually at both ends of the cable and at both sides of any production break.

N/A: Not applicable.

To minimize Passive Intermodulation (PIM), the coaxial cable between the DLNA and the antenna must be double-shielded (braid and foil wrap) with gold-plated and soldered

(not crimped) connector contacts. Do not use nickel, nickel plating, or stainless steel.

B. Installation Wiring Notes

This section includes wiring notes and connection details about strapping.

(1) Source/Destination Identification

Source/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided for the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. Pins marked 0 are left open-circuit and pins marked 1 are strapped on the airframe side of the connector to the pin assigned as SDI Common (TP5D).

For this HGA application, strap pin TP5B (1) and leave TP5A (0) open.

NOTE: The logic for the SDI/WOW is explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic

Attachment 1-4, Note 19. The SDI/WOW logic in this case (where 0=open and 1=strapped to common) is the reverse of the logic applied to all other

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal connectors, FWD ID, system configuration, and data I/O configuration, where 0=strapped to common and 1=open.

(2) Maintenance Port Interface

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal has an RS-232 maintenance port interface that provides access to the MPU for data loading, system monitoring, and testing purposes.

Access to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU is achieved by connecting an RS-232,

VT-100 terminal (computer operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 maintenance port.

23-15-30

3-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port is available at the front of the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the terminal. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area.

NOTE: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot operate simultaneously.

Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for information on how to connect

and use the maintenance port, including equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details.

(3) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface

Several external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain) that must be delimited to ensure proper operation dictate the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performance requirements.

Table 3-2 defines the RF parameters and their expected values.

Antenna Gain

Table 3-2 RF Parameters Definitions

Parameter Min. Value (dB)

Antenna to DLNA Loss

53 DLNA Gain

DLNA Noise Figure

DLNA to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal (Rx) Loss 6

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to Antenna (Tx) Loss 0

DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port) –

Max. Value (dB)

0.3

1.8

5 (including DLNA loss)

0.8

(4) WOW Pins

The WOW1 and WOW2 pins are either left open circuit or connected to the airframe

DC ground through a ground proximity switch. The WOW Program Select (PGM) pin is either left open circuit or connected to the Forward Address Common. The two ground states for any pin are open and closed circuit.

Resolve any conflict between WOW1 and WOW2 by assuming the aircraft is in-air.

The interpretation of the state of the WOW1 and WOW2 pins is defined by the state

of the WOW program select pin. Refer to Table 3-3 for details.

23-15-30

3-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 3-3 WOW Pin Wiring

Pin Name and Location

WOW1

TP3G

WOW2

TP3K

PGM

TP3J

Aircraft Status

CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED In-air

OPEN CLOSED CLOSED Not valid—Default in-air

CLOSED OPEN

OPEN OPEN

CLOSED

Not valid—Default in-air

On-ground

CLOSED CLOSED OPEN

OPEN CLOSED OPEN

CLOSED OPEN

OPEN OPEN

OPEN

On-ground

Not valid—Default in-air

In-air

WOW discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground and are used for flight data-logging purposes. Since data that the aircraft is airborne is supplied to the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal by other equipment, this information from the discretes is not required. WOW is only used to determine aircraft on-ground status, if the Inertial

Reference System (IRS) has no valid data, and the CMC is not installed, or if the

CMC is not providing valid data.

The function of WOW can inhibit RF transmission when the aircraft is on the ground.

This function is disabled by default and must be enabled through the ORT parameter

TRANSMIT ON GROUND—see "Configuring Transmit on Ground" on page 6-27.

NOTE: If the WOW function is disabled, do not perform normal maintenance when the system is active to avoid RF exposure. Follow normal safety procedures and disable the system before performing antenna maintenance.

(5) ICAO IDs

TheHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal requires an ICAO ID to operate and access classic services. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives the ICAO ID either from discrete strapping or from an ARINC 429 source as determined by the ICAO CODE SOURCE

ORT parameter—see "Configuring the ICAO Code Source" on page 6-15.

Figure 3-2 provides an example of a strapped ICAO ID address. This number (for

example: Decimal 11256099, Hex ABC123, or Octal 52740443) must be converted into a binary number for strapping.

NOTE: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit.

23-15-30

3-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 3-2 ICAO ID, Hex to Binary Conversion

A pin strapped to the same potential as TP7K is considered a logical 0, whereas an open circuit pin is considered a logical 1.

23-15-30

3-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(6) Remote Status Panel (Optional)

An optional remote status panel may be installed when HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a remote status panel is recommended as it provides visual indications of the power and faults for each terminal.

A remote reset switch for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals can also be installed and

located with the remote status panel. Figure 3-3 illustrates a typical wiring diagram

for the remote reset circuit.

(a) Remote Reset Circuit Switch Requirements

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch

circuit as shown in Figure 3-3.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (includes all cable and switch contact resistance).

Figure 3-3 Remote Reset Circuit Switch

(b) Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements

The circuit requirements for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Remote Status LED

drivers are shown in Figure 3-4. Each LED driver circuit provides an open-drain

Field-Effect Transistor (FET) interface that has a maximum continuous drain-to-source voltage of 35 V dc and drain-to-source current of 0.5 A dc. These circuits are designed to sink current to ground only. Any external lamps or LEDs connected to these driver circuits require the appropriate external voltage and series impedance to be connected.

23-15-30

3-9

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 3-4 Remote LED Panel Circuit

(7) System Configuration Strapping

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector.

Configuration pins are assigned based on system mode configuration selection and

data I/O requirements, as shown in Table 3-4. Detailed pin assignment is shown in

Table 3-5.

Pin Number

TP4A to D

MP5G to K

Table 3-4 Configuration Pin Summary

Name

System Config 1 to 4

I/O config 1 to 4

Function

System Mode Strap Pins

Not assigned (set to 1)

NOTE: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19.

• Pins marked 0 are signaled by strapping to Address Common (TP7K).

• Pins marked 1 are signaled by an open circuit-no connection.

• Configurations resulting in all ones (1) are invalid.

(8) System Mode Strap Pins Coding

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be externally strapped according to its intended

operational configuration mode. Table 3-5 illustrates the system pin strapping for

currently supported HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operational modes and configurations.

23-15-30

3-10

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 3-5 System Pin Strapping

TP4A TP4B

Pin Status

TP4C System Mode

Valid - provides Aero H+ services only

Valid - provides Aero H+ and Swift services

TP4D

All other combinations are invalid and could cause an operating failure.

NOTE: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19.

• Pins marked 0 are signaled by strapping to Address Common (TP7K).

• Pins marked 1 are signaled by an open circuit—no connection.

• Configurations resulting in all ones (1) are invalid.

(9) Call Light Activation Strapping

Table 3-6 shows the configuration strapping for call light activation.

Pin Number

TP4E

Table 3-6 Call Light Activation Configuration Strapping

Name

Call Light Activation

Function

Determines whether the call light illuminates on call activation or initialization. Activation occurs when the

GES is responding to the call request, and initialization occurs the moment the call is placed. (1=Activation;

0=Initialization)

(10)Hookswitch Strapping

Table 3-7 shows the configuration strapping for the hookswitch method.

Pin Number

TP2G

Table 3-7 Hookswitch Configuration Strapping

Name

Hookswitch Method Determines Push To Talk (PTT) or Latched Mode

(0=Latched; 1=PTT)

Function

(11) Priority 4 Call Strapping

Table 3-8 shows the configuration strapping for priority 4 calls.

23-15-30

3-11

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Pin Number

TP4F

Table 3-8 Priority 4 Call Configuration Strapping

Name

Inhibit Priority 4 Calls

Function

Determines whether priority 4 calls are inhibited to and from the cockpit. When these calls are inhibited, incoming calls are not allowed, and outgoing priority 4 calls are rejected. (1=Uninhibited; 0=Inhibited)

(12)Cockpit Voice Strapping

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal announces incoming calls with chimes and lights or the Call Control (CD) discretes, as determined by the Cockpit Call Signaling Mode

ORT parameter. If set to Light/Chime, the strapping for this function is shown in

Table 3-9.

TP4G

Table 3-9 Chime and Light Strapping for Cockpit Voice

TP4H

Strapped Strapped

Lights

Spare

Chime

Strapped Open Steady Multi-stroke (chime sounds every 0.5 to 1 second)

Open

Strapped Flashing

Open Steady

Single-stroke (chime sounds once)

Single-stroke

(13)User Interfaces

To facilitate access to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area.

(a) ISDN Interface

Install an RJ45 connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface.

(b) Ethernet Data Interface

Install one or two RJ45 interface connectors in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interfaces.

Details relating to the RJ45 cable terminations required for both the ISDN and/or

10BASE-T services are shown in Figure 3-5 and Table 3-10.

23-15-30

3-12

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 3-5 RJ45 Connector Terminator Details

SIGNAL

RX+

RX-

TX+

TX-

PIN

ECS

White

Blue

White

Orange

Table 3-10 RJ45 Wiring Details

EURO ISDN

CABLE

OTHER

White/green

Green

Blue

White/blue

Service

ETHERNET 10BASE-T

PIN

ECS

White

CABLE

OTHER

Green

White

White/orange stripe

Orange/white stripe or solid orange

White/green stripe

2 Brown

Green/white stripe or solid Green

Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements.

Cables #922404 (4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by

Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used.

(14)System Interfaces

(a) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface

Navigational information is provided to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through

the high-speed ARINC 429 IRS bus interface. Refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for more information. The IRS bus connects through the top plug of the

ARINC 600 connector to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal as follows:

23-15-30

3-13

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• IRS#1 A TP4J

• IRS#1 B TP4K

• IRS#2 A TP5C*

• IRS#2 B TP5E*

You can configure IRS#2 as a secondary IRS bus, or an input bus for the

AES ID.

(b) Antenna Interface

The ARINC 741 antenna subsystem BSU is connected to the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal as specified in Table 3-11.

Table 3-11 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to BSU Interconnects

Signal Source

Signal Name

HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal

Mechanical

HGA

Phased-Array or

Conformal HGA

Signal

Destination

HPA MUTE A

Top/Port BSU-G TP3A

STBD BSU-G TP3C

HPA MUTE B

BSU BITE A

BSU-W(G)*

Top/Port BSU-H TP3B

STBD BSU-H TP3D

Port BSU-W

STBD BSU-W

TP2A

TP2C

BSU BITE B

Multi-Control A

Multi-Control B

TP3E

TP3F

BSU-X(H) Port BSU-X

STBD BSU-X

TP2B

TP2D

BSU-T(A)

BSU-U(B)

* Letters in (brackets) represent EMS Aviation AMT-50 BSU pin designations

Top/Port (T/P): Refers to Mechanical (fin-mount) HGA Subsystem

Port: Refers to Phased Array (Fuselage-mount) or Port side of Dual (side)

Conformal-mount, HGA subsystem

Starboard (STBD): Refers to starboard side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount HGA subsystem

NOTE: If a third MCDU is installed, the HSD-440 cannot use the side mount antennas because the input is allocated to either the third MCDU or the starboard BSU Bite.

23-15-30

3-14

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Data rates, voltage thresholds, and electrical interface specifications are per

ARINC Specification 429. (741 p2-7 p4.7.2). The ARINC 600 wiring interconnections for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and each CMU are shown in

Table 3-12.

Pin

TP1A

TP1B

TP1C

TP1D

MP1K

MP2K

Table 3-12 CMU Strapping

Name

CMU 1 Input A

CMU 1 Input B

CMU 1/2 Output A

CMU 1/2 Output B

CMU 2 Input A

CMU 2 Input B

CMU 1 TP1A

CMU 1 TP1B

CMU 1/2 MP2C

CMU 1/2 MP2D

CMU 2 TP1A

CMU 2 TP1B

You can set the bus speed either low or high. Both the transmit and receive ports of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ARINC 429 CMU ports operate together at either low speed or high speed. Both CMUs therefore work at either low speed or high speed, but not at different speeds. You can select the speed by setting a flag in the ORT parameter CMU INPUT SPEED SELECT and CMU OUTPUT

SPEED SELECT instead of setting a program pin on the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal A600 connector (there are no pins available). If information is not available from the ORT, the bus speed default is low.

(d) MCDU Interface

Table 3-13 shows the strapping for the MCDU.

Table 3-13 MCDU Strapping

Pin

TP2C

TP2D

MP3E

MP3F

MP7G

MP7H

MP7J

MP7K

Name

MCDU 3 input A

MCDU 3 input B

MCDU 2 input A

MCDU 2 input B

MCDU 1 input A

MCDU 1 input B

MCDU 1/2/3 output A

MCDU 1/2/3 output B

C. Connection Details

"Connection Details" on page 3-19 provides all top, middle, and bottom plug connection

details for all installations.

23-15-30

3-15

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

5. Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test

This section describes the passive intermodulation (PIM) test. You must execute the PIM test after installation, if theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operates in SwiftBroadband mode.

A. Overview

To meet Inmarsat requirements for SBB operation, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can test for passive intermodulation effects. The PIM test verifies that the transmit signal from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not degrade or interfere with the receive signals as a result of PIM.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can only perform the PIM test when the aircraft is on the ground.

When theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminallogs on to the SBB network, the network assigns the terminal two channels for PIM testing. These channels are not used by other terminals so that theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminalcan transmit the test frequencies without interfering with other satellite communication equipment or the Inmarsat satellite.

NOTE: You can monitor the progress of the PIM test by turning on report 208 in the

HSD-440 Mark 2 TerminalMPU. When report 208 is not running, the terminal displays only the results of the test, not the progress.

B. PIM Requirements

In order to successfully perform the PIM test, the aircraft and the satellite communication system must meet the following requirements:

• The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must have successfully logged on to a satellite that is visible at the test location within the last 168 hours (8 days).

• The aircraft must not be near any sources of PIM, such as hangars and towers.

• The aircraft must be facing due north in the northern hemisphere, and due south in the southern hemisphere.

C. PIM Test

To start the PIM test:

1. In theHSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, navigate to Menu 30.

MENU 30 FIRMWARE Vx.x GND

L list PIMBIT parameters M initiate manual PIMBIT

F fakeout PIMBIT parameters P initiate/stop PIMBIT

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

2. To start the PIM test, press p .

The PIM test starts. The test takes about five minutes.

23-15-30

3-16

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

D. PIM Test Results

(1) PIM Test Overall Status

At the end of the PIM test, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal displays the test results.

Figure 3-6 shows an example of the test results.

23-15-30

3-17

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PIMBIT REPORT: OVERALL STATUS PASS

TEST STARTED: Jan 16 08:15:58 2001 TEST ENDED: Jan 16 08:20:36 2001

ICAO ADDRESS: NOT OBTAINED ANTENNA SERIAL NUMBER: 456

TESTED USING MANUALLY ENTERED FREQUENCIES

TRANSMIT CHANNEL 1 = $1CE8 (1630.000 MHz)

TRANSMIT CHANNEL 2 = $4268 (1654.000 MHz)

RECEIVE CHANNEL = $4B00 (1558.000 MHz)

INTERMOD ORDER = 7.00

LAST INFORMATION RECEIVED (APPROX) 8:00:00 Tue Jan 16, 2001

PARAMETERS UNCHANGED SINCE 8:00:00 Tue Jan 16, 2001

DIRECTION 1: STATUS PASS

GEOGRAPHIC AZ=-11.00 DEG EL=12.50 VEH-REL AZ=-162.50 EL=12.50

SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.14 dB STD DEV 0.03 dB

?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m

SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.19 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.71 dBm

SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.05 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.85 dBm

DIRECTION 2: STATUS PASS

GEOGRAPHIC AZ=0.00 DEG EL=18.00 VEH-REL AZ=-151.50 EL=18.00

SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.07 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB

?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m

SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -16.66 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.92 dBm

SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.23 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -33.05 dBm

DIRECTION 3: STATUS PASS

GEOGRAPHIC AZ=11.00 DEG EL=12.50 VEH-REL AZ=-140.50 EL=12.50

SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.14 dB STD DEV 0.02 dB

?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m

SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -16.01 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.96 dBm

SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.21 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.94 dBm

DIRECTION 4: STATUS PASS

GEOGRAPHIC AZ=-11.00 DEG EL=18.00 VEH-REL AZ=-162.50 EL=18.00

SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.13 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB

?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m

SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -16.04 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -32.84 dBm

DIRECTION 5: STATUS PASS

GEOGRAPHIC AZ=0.00 DEG EL=12.50 VEH-REL AZ=-151.50 EL=12.50

SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.12 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB

?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m

SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.00 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -32.73 dBm

DIRECTION 6: STATUS PASS

GEOGRAPHIC AZ=11.00 DEG EL=18.00 VEH-REL AZ=-140.50 EL=18.00

SIGNAL DEGRADATION: MEAN 0.10 dB STD DEV 0.01 dB

?[7m!! POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE !!?[0m

SIGNAL BEFORE TEST: -17.14 dBm NOISE BEFORE TEST: -33.03 dBm

SIGNAL AFTER TEST: -17.87 dBm NOISE AFTER TEST: -33.02 dBm

PIMBIT COMPLETE

Figure 3-6 Example PIM Test Results

23-15-30

3-18

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The first line of the PIMBIT report displays the overall PIM status. If the overall status is PASS, the HSD-440 can continue to use SBB services.

If the overall status is FAIL:

• Check the cable connections of the antenna and the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

• Check the direction in which the test failed and verify that the antenna is not

blocked in that direction—see "Directional PIM Test Results" on page 3-19.

(2) Directional PIM Test Results

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal performs the PIM test with the antenna pointing in different directions and displays the results of the test in each direction. If the overall status of the PIM test is FAIL, you can check the specific directions in which the test failed.

For each direction, the PIM test results provide:

• Overall Status—pass or fail.

• The direction coordinates.

• The signal degradation—the maximum value to pass the test is 3 dB.

• Possible interference—interference caused by environmental factors, not the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmit frequencies. Interference indicates that the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal received a signal in the receive band even when it wasn’t transmitting, therefore an external signal may be interfering with communication in that direction.

• Signal and noise levels before and after the test—the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses this information to check for possible interference.

6. Installation and Engineering Diagrams

This section contains the Outline and Installation diagrams, and Interconnection and Contact

Assignment drawings for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.

All foldout pages are odd-numbered and not-backed for print production purposes.

A. Outline and Installation Diagrams

Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8 illustrate the physical characteristics of the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal and provides installation data for the terminal.

B. Interconnection and Contact Assignment Drawings

Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the Interconnection details for the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminals.

7. Connection Details

Table 3-14, Table 3-15, and Table 3-16 show the top, middle, and bottom plug connection

details for HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminals.

23-15-30

3-19

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

I/O

I 1A

I 1B

O 1C

O 1D

Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details

From

Top

Plug

Signal Name To Description

CMU 1 Input A

CMU 1 Input B

CMU 1/2 Output A

CMU 1/2 Output B

CMU 1 TP1A

CMU 1 TP1B

CMU 1/2 MP2C

CMU 1/2 MP2D

CMU 1 RX A

CMU 1 RX B

CMU 1/2 TX A

CMU 1/2 TX B

I 1E

I 1F

O 1G

O 1H

I 1J

ARINC 615 Input A

ARINC 615 Input B

ARINC 615 Output A

ARINC 615 Output B

ARINC 615 Link A

ARINC 615 Link B

(GND)

BSU Top/Port BITE A

Mech. Steered Antenna

(MA): BSU, Pin G or W or

Other Antenna (OA): BSU,

PORT-W and starboard-P

ARINC Tx-HI BITE from

BSU

BSU Top/Port BITE B

BSU Starboard (STBD)

BITE A or MCDU 3 Input

BSU STBD BITE B or MCDU 3 Input B

MA: BSU, Pin H or X, or OA:

BSU, PORT-X and STBD-R

MA: Not required

OA: BSU, PORT-P and

STBD-W

MA: Not required

OA: BSU, PORT-R and

STBD-X

ARINC Tx-LO BITE from BSU

ARINC Tx-HI BITE from

BSU

ARINC Tx-LO BITE from BSU

Spare 1 ARINC 429

Output A

Spare 1 ARINC 429

Output B

Hookswitch method

Spare 2 ARINC 429

Input A

Spare 2 ARINC 429

Input B

ARINC 615 Data Loader

I 2K Remote Reset

Normally open momentary switch-open side.

(Closed side to MP1F)

Remote System Reset

23-15-30

3-20

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details (Continued)

I/O

From

Top

Plug

Signal Name To Description

I 3A

Top/Port HPA MUTE A

Top/Port HPA MUTE B

STBD HPA MUTE A

STBD HPA MUTE B

MA: Not required

OA: BSU, PORT-G

MA: Not required

OA: BSU, PORT-H

MA: Not required

OA: BSU, STBD G

MA: Not required

OA: BSU, STBD-H

HPA Mute-A, Port BSU

HPA Mute-B, Port BSU

HPA Mute-A, STBD

BSU

HPA Mute-B, STBD

BSU

Multi-Control A

Multi-Control B

MA: BSU, Pin A or T, or OA:

BSU, PORT-T and STBD-T

Multi-Control-HI to

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal and antenna subsystem

MA: BSU, Pin B or U, or OA:

BSU, PORT-U and STBD-U

Multi-Control-LO to

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal and antenna subsystem

I 3H

I 3G

I 3K

I 3J

4A–4D

Tx Disable

WOW 1

WOW 2

WOW Program Select

System Config 1 to 4

TP3G

TP3K

TP3J

4A and 4C=0 (TP7K common), 4B,

4D=1(open) for standalone mode and

Wire 4A 4C, 4D =0 (TP7K common), 4B =1 (open) for

Aero only operation

Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of

ARINC 741, Part 1.

Refer to "WOW Pins" on page 3-6

Open for Call light On at

Call Connection

I 4E Call light activation

Closed for Call Light on at Call Initiation

Open Allow Priority 4 calls to and from

Cockpit

I 4F Priority 4 Calls

Closed Inhibit Priority 4 calls to and from

Cockpit

23-15-30

3-21

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 3-14 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Top Plug Connection Details (Continued)

I/O

From

Top

Plug

Signal Name To Description

G=0(strapped),

4H=1(open) Steady lamp, multi-stroke chime

I 4G Chime/light option MS

4G=1(open),

4H=0(strapped)

Flashing lamp, single stroke chime

4G=1(open),

4H=1(open) Steady lamp, single-stroke chime

I 4H

I 4J

I 4K

I 5A

Chime/light option LS

IRS 1A

IRS 1B

SDI 1

SDI 2

Spare 1 ARINC 429

Input A

Aircraft main IRS

Not connected

SDI common (TP5D)

IRS 429 data, Rx HI

IRS 429 data, Rx LO

HPA Select Code for

HGA

HPA Select Code for

HGA

I 5D SDI Common

5C IRS #2 Input A

5E IRS #2 Input B

SDI Common for HPA select codes

I 5E

I 5F–7J

Spare 1 ARINC 429

Input B

ICAO Address,

BITS 24 to 1

1 = no connection

0 = common (TP7K)

I 7K

ICAO Address,

Common

Common GND connection for system and I/O configuration and ICAO ID

23-15-30

3-22

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

I 1K

O 2A

I 2B

O 2C

O 2D

I 2E

I 2F

O 2G

O 2H

I 2K

O 3A

I 3B

I 3C

I/O

Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details

From

Middle

Plug

Signal Name To Description

Discrete output 1

Discrete output 2

Remote status panel

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal-Power On

(Optional)

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal-Fault

(Optional)

Spare

Switch HI current from chime

1D 1E outputs to Audio control panel

Discrete Common Remote status panel Discrete Common

I/O

Maint Port Tx

Maint Port Rx

Maint Port Signal

Ground

CMU 2 Input A

Data I/O Tx

Data I/O Rx

SDU data

SCM data

Maint Port serial data,

DB9S-2

Maint Port serial data,

DB9S-3

Maint Port serial data,

DB9S-5

CMU 2 TP1A

No connection

Future

SCM data

SCM power +12 V

Future

SCM power return 0 V Future

Data I/O Ground No connection

CMU 2 Input B

Call light 1

Mic on 1

Chime light inhibit

CMU 2 TP1B

Audio Control Panel

Audio Management System

Audio Control Panel

Maintenance computer

(laptop/PC), for Remote access

CMU 2 RX A

CMU 2 RX B

23-15-30

3-23

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details (Continued)

I/O

From

Middle

Plug

Signal Name To Description

I 3D

I 3E

I 3F

O 3G

I 3H

I 3J

Place/end 1

MCDU 2 input A

MCDU 2 input B

Call light 2

Mic on 2

Go-ahead / Chime reset

Place/End 2

Audio Management System

MCDU 2 J4-27

MCDU 2 J4-28

Audio Control Panel

Audio Management System

Audio Control Panel

MCDU 2 RX A

MCDU 2 RX B

I/O

POTS 1 TIP

POTS 1 RING

POTS 2 TIP

Audio Management System

2-wire Analog Phone TIP

(RJ-11, Pin 3)

2-wire Analog Phone RING

(RJ-11, Pin 2)

2-wire Analog Phone TIP

(RJ-11, Pin 3)

POTS Line 1

POTS Line 2

I/O

I/O 4G–4K

I 5A

POTS 2 RING

Input Audio 1 HI

Input Audio 1 LO

CEPT-E1 Rx+

CEPT-E1 Rx-

CEPT-E1 Tx+

CEPT-E1 Tx-

2-wire Analog Phone RING

(RJ-11, Pin 2) cockpit headset 1 cockpit headset 1

CTU Satcom1 E1 TX+

CTU Satcom1 E1 TX-

CTU Satcom1 E1 RX+

CTU Satcom1 E1 RXcockpit headset 1

Reserved

CTU E1 Bus

Output Audio 1 HI

Output Audio 1 LO

Cockpit Headset 2

Microphone HI

Cockpit Headset 2

Microphone LO

Cockpit Headset 1

Speaker

I/O 5G–5K Reserved

23-15-30

3-24

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 3-15 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Middle Plug Connection Details (Continued)

I/O

From

Middle

Plug

Signal Name To Description

I 6A

I 6B

O 6C

O 6D

I 6E

I 6F

ISDN 1 Rx+

ISDN 1 Rx-

ISDN 1 Tx+

ISDN 1 Tx-

Input Audio 2 HI

Input Audio 2 LO

ISDN, RJ45-3

ISDN, RJ45-6

ISDN, RJ45-4

ISDN, RJ45-5

User data, ISDN-1

Refer to "User

Interfaces" on page

3-12

Cockpit Headset 2

Microphone HI

O 6G 10BASE-T Tx+

10BASE-T Tx-

10BASE-T Rx+

10BASE-T Rx-

10BASE-T Tx+

10BASE-T Tx-

10BASE-T Rx+

10BASE-T Rx-

Output Audio 2 HI

Cockpit Headset 2

Microphone LO

Ethernet 10BASE-T

RJ45, Pin 2

Ethernet 10BASE-T

RJ45, Pin 3

Ethernet 10BASE-T

RJ45, Pin 6

Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1

Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2

Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3

Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6

Cockpit Voice

Microphone 2

Port 1

User data

Ethernet 10BASE-T

Cockpit Headset 2 Speaker

O 7F

I 7G

I 7H

O 7J

O 7K

O C1

Output Audio 2 LO

MCDU 1 Input A

MCDU 1 Input B

MCDU 1/2 Output A

MCDU 1/2 Output B

RF Tx Output

Antenna subsystem-DLNA or HPR-J

Coaxial cable, RF

Transmit

23-15-30

3-25

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

I/O

I/O BP4

I/O BP5

I/O BP6

I BP1

Table 3-16 HSD-440 Stand-Alone Terminal Bottom Plug Connection Details

From

Bottom

Plug

BP2

Signal Name To

Aircraft power source, HOT

Description

BP3

+28 V dc HOT

+28 V dc return

GND

Aircraft power source, return

+28 V dc supply

BP8 Chassis GND Aircraft ground

Aircraft Chassis

Ground

Reserved

Spare

Reserved

BP7

I/O BP9–BP11

115 V ac HOT

115 V ac COLD

Aircraft power source, HOT

Aircraft power source, COLD

115 V ac 400 Hz supply

BP12

BP13

RF Rx Input Antenna subsystem-DLNA

Spare

Coaxial cable, RF

Receive

Reserved

23-15-30

3-26

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 3-7 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram

(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A)

23-15-30

3-27

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

3-28

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 3-8 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Outline and Installation Diagram

(1252-E-3820-01, Rev A)

23-15-30

3-29

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

3-30

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 3-9 (Sheet 1). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B)

23-15-30

3-31

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

3-32

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 3-10 (Sheet 2). HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

System Interconnection Diagram (1252-B-3820, Rev B)

23-15-30

3-33

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

3-34

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION

This chapter provides information required to determine the operational readiness of HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminals and aid service personnel in diagnosing system faults. The operational and diagnostic tests described in this section require using the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s built-in diagnostic tool, the MPU.

This chapter includes:

•

Operational and Diagnostic Testing

•

Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation

•

Adjustment/Alignment Procedures

•

Modification History

NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed, the MPU report and menu screens displayed may differ from those shown as examples in this manual. The menu screens in this section correspond to the HSD-440 Stand-Alone terminal in maintenance user mode.

1. Operational and Diagnostic Testing

This section includes the following sections:

•

General

•

Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements

•

Terminal Maintenance Port Utility

•

Inmarsat Cause Codes

•

Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures

A. General

Usually, terminals require testing for one of the following reasons:

• To verify the operational readiness of the terminal during and after installation on an aircraft

• To verify that a fault exists and produce system reports for troubleshooting purposes

• To verify the operational readiness of repaired LRUs during re-installation on an aircraft

This section includes test and fault isolation procedures for the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminals. All test and load procedures require the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, which is accessed by connecting to the maintenance port of the terminal.

B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements

Table 4-1 lists the equipment required to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU and

perform operational and diagnostic testing and software loading on the HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal.

23-15-30

4-35

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Item

Computer

VT-100 terminal emulation program

Cable, maintenance port interface cable

Multimeter

General purpose toolset

Table 4-1 List of Required Test Equipment

Equipment

Standard

HyperTerminal©,

ProComm Plus©, or equivalent

Special

See "Connection

Requirements" on page 4-37

Standard

Specification

VT-100 386 CPU, 20 MHz or higher

Serial communication program using an

RS-232 port

Quantity

Remote access maximum cable length

25 ft. (From ARINC 600 connector to

DB9 breakout connector)

Test cable maximum length 25 ft.

–

(From HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to management computer)

Front Panel access maximum cable length 50 ft.

Table 4-2 lists the optional equipment or information that is not required, but may increase

test efficiency or allow for optional diagnostic procedures. Equivalent substitutions may be used.

Table 4-2 List of Optional Test Equipment

Item Equipment

Service Provider Information Package Special

Internet access Standard

Time Domain Refectometer Standard

Specification

Inmarsat service provider

Inmarsat Swift 64 high-speed data

–

Quantity

C. Terminal Maintenance Port Utility

This section describes the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU and provides the connection and cabling details required to access and use the program.

(1) General Overview

The MPU, built into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal's operational software, provides a system interface for fault isolation and diagnostic procedures.

To use the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, connect an RS-232, VT-100 terminal

(computer operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 maintenance port interface of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

The maintenance port on the front panel of HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provides a direct connection to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU using a DB25 connector.

Optionally, remote cabin access is possible using a DB9 connector via the ARINC

600 connector.

23-15-30

4-36

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(2) Connection Requirements

This section describes specific cabling requirements needed to connect to and use the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.

(a) Cabling Notes

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals provide two options to connect to the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port and MPU: direct connection and remote connection.

Table 4-3, Table 4-4, Figure 4-1, and Figure 4-2 provide cabling details for the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal for both direct and remote connection types. Select one of these connection options to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.

NOTE: The direct and remote connection points to the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously.

Pin Definition

Maint Port SGND

Maint Port Rx

Maint Port Tx

Table 4-3 Remote Connection Cabling

Remote Access

ARINC Connector

(Rear)

Remote (DB9)

(MP1J)

(MP1H)

(MP1G)

Cable

(See Figure 4-1)

Computer

(DB9P)

Pin Definition

Maint Port SGND

Maint Port Rx

Maint Port Tx

Table 4-4 Direct Connection Cabling

Front Panel

Direct Connection

Maintenance Cable

Connector (DB25P)

Cable

(See Figure 4-2)

Computer

(DB9P)

(b) Maintenance Port Cable Assembly

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance cable connections may vary in length, type of connection used, and connector pin call outs, depending on the access point used.

The cable assembly for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal assumes that the computer's COM port interface is a 9-Pin, D-Sub connector (DB9). Cable

assembly details for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are presented in Figure 4-1 and

Figure 4-2.

NOTE: The maximum cable length, shown in Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2,

assumes that the length is measured from the ARINC 600 connector to the DB9 breakout connector.

23-15-30

4-37

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure 4-1 Remote Connection, Maintenance Cable

Figure 4-2 Direct Connection, Maintenance Cable

A standard VT-100 compatible terminal running an emulator program (such as

HyperTerminal, ProComm Plus, or similar) provides the user interface to the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU. The RS-232 terminal connection settings for

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance ports are listed in Table 4-5.

23-15-30

4-38

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-5 Terminal Connection Settings

Parameter

Character Format

Baud Rate

No. of bits

Parity

Stop bits

Flow Control

ASCII

19200 bps

None

Setting

(3) Accessing the MPU

There are various levels of access to the MPU. Each level is protected by a different password.

This document describes End User and Field Representative access levels. These levels provide access and tools for operational testing and verification, software updates, and the basic system monitoring and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual.

(a) Level 1 Access

This limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product.

It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel.

The password for access to this level is menu.

(b) Level 2 Access

This level is for trained original equipment manufacturer (OEM) installers and product support personnel. This access level supports read and limited write capabilities. Users can disable, mask, or clear faults, change satellite or

LES/GES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and maintain and upgrade the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

The password for this level is maint.

(4) Using the Terminal MPU

This section describes the basic procedures for using and navigating the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal MPU.

(a) Entering Passwords

You can enter the password any time after the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boots.

• To access Level 1 functions, type menu .

• To access Level 2 functions, type maint .

NOTE: The password does not appear on the screen when you type it.

23-15-30

4-39

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(b) Navigating the Terminal MPU

• To scroll through the available menus, press CTRL+N.

• To go to the previous menu, press CTRL+O.

• To refresh the menu screen or exit from a Reports Menu, press ESC.

To enable test or data entry functions, press the letter associated with the menu items.

(d) Selecting Reports

The reports available through the MPU enable users to view information about the configuration and status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. This information is used to troubleshoot the communication system on the aircraft.

"Report Descriptions" on page 4-53 provides more information about reports.

To access reports:

1. In the MPU, press EQUAL SIGN.

A list of reports appears. Active reports show as toggled on. Inactive reports show as toggled off.

2. To activate a report, type the report number, and then press ENTER.

NOTE: Multiple reports can be activated at the same time; type and enter each report number separately.

3. To turn off individual, active reports, type the report number you want to toggle off, and then press ENTER.

4. To turn off all active reports, press EQUAL SIGN, and then press X.

(5) Menu Item Descriptions

This section provides a brief description of the Level 2, MPU menu items used for test and fault isolation procedures.

Although this section only provides illustrations and descriptions for Level 2 access, all Level 1 access menu items are covered. (All Level 1 menus are included in Level

2 Menus.)

In active HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals, menu screens display the firmware version.

NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the system configuration, the menu and reports available to users may differ slightly from the illustrations shown and described in this document.

(a) Menu 1

Figure shows an example Menu 1 screen display. Table 4-6 describes the items

available in Menu 1.

23-15-30

4-40

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MENU 1 FIRMWARE Vx.x GND

X override forward id/ICAO address L test LEDs

Y explain error status U list event log (hex)

F print equipment stats M clear equipment stats

N permit TFTP software loads

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Menu 1 Screen Display

Table 4-6 Menu 1 Item Descriptions

Menu Item

X: override forward id/ICAO address

Description

Used in testing and fault isolation.

Enter a test or alternate FWD ID or ICAO ID to use during fault isolation procedures. Resetting the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal or cycling the power cancels this function.

Y: explain error status Reports error status when failure LED is illuminated.

F: print equipment stats

Prints a list of the current equipment statistics.

N: permit TFTP software loads

L: test LEDs

Upgrade or load HSD software using the EMS serial data loader connected to the HSD terminal maintenance port and using TFTP over the front panel

Ethernet port.

Note: When this option is enabled, software loads start within the next 10 minutes. To enable this option, the aircraft air/ground status must be on-ground.

Toggles the Power On (LED 1) and Fault (LED 2) LEDs on (A) and off (D) or returns them to software control (X).

U: list event log

M: clear equipment stats

Lists the current event log.

Resets the equipment statistics. (See Item F.)

(b) Menu 2

Figure 4-3 shows an example MPU Menu 2 screen display. Table 4-7 describes

the items available in Menu 2.

23-15-30

4-41

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MENU 2 FIRMWARE Vx.x GND

A set veh-relative azimuth E set veh-relative elevation

K desired az veh-rel velocity R resume automatic steering

T enter time of day N annotate log file

L re-enter logon password V get firmware versions

Z reset 1252-A-3800-01 S set satellite longitude

G manual antenna steering

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-3 Menu 2 Screen Display

Menu Item

NOTE: Menu 2 selections A and E are used to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and/or peak for maximum signal reception. These commands are typically used where no IRS data is available.

A: set veh-relative azimuth

Antenna azimuth pointing offset with reference to the front centerline of the aircraft.

Offset value entered in degrees from 0 to 180, where a positive entry is clockwise (cw) and a negative entry is counterclockwise (ccw).

K: desired az veh-rel velocity

Activates continuous antenna azimuth sweep at a set elevation, as entered with menu item E.

Azimuth sweep velocity entered as deg/sec value.

T: enter time of day

NOTE: When combined with a signal-monitoring reports selection, sweep the antenna for maximum signal strength to determine optimum location coordinates.

Permits the entry of date and time for initial one-time setting of the Real

Time Clock.

Permits a user to enter a new access level password: menu or maint.

L: re-enter logon password

Z: reset terminal

Table 4-7 Menu 2 Item Descriptions

Description

G: manual antenna steering

E: set veh-relative elevation

Enables a complete, soft reset of the LRU; once reset, the menu access password must be re-entered.

Set manual antenna-steering in both azimuth and elevation.

Four options:

• I increases elevation 0.5 deg

• M decreases elevation 0.5 deg

• L increases azimuth 0.5 deg

• J decreases azimuth 0.5 deg

Antenna elevation pointing offset with respect to the aircraft horizontal rest position; i.e., assumed to have no pitch or roll offset.

Offset value entered in degrees from 0 to 90.

23-15-30

4-42

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-7 Menu 2 Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

R: resume automatic steering

N: annotate log file

Description

Re-activates programmed automatic antenna-steering in both azimuth and elevation.

Allows for input of text into a log file.

This feature can be used to document information such as test conditions, system or aircraft identification, or any pertinent information for later review.

V: get firmware versions Displays the system Kernel and Application software versions, and the channel card(s) and HPA firmware revisions.

S: set satellite longitude Sets the satellite longitude.

Table 4-7Figure 4-4 shows the menu 3 screen display. Table 4-8 describes the

items available in Menu 3.

MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x

L list EEPROM S list event log

C clear event log M misc. EEPROM parameter

F list call log G clear call log

O list ORT P ocean region parameter

I set all LES id's H list SCM/CP ORT

K set CP ORT parameter R copy CP ORT to SCM

T write defaults to CP ORT U clear SCM ORT

D output binary ORT V bulletin board satellite data

B list channel card event log

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-4 Menu 3 Screen Display

Menu Item

L: list EEPROM

C: clear event log

F: list call log

Table 4-8 Menu 3 Item Descriptions

Description

Displays a list of all system EEPROM parameters and their corresponding values (this function is READ only).

Certain parameters are set using Menu 3, item M selection.

Clears all events stored in non-volatile RAM.

Displays call log files for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. When selected, three options are available:

• To display complete list of all log files, press F.

• To list extended EIRP trace data, press X.

• To list all remaining entries, press PERIOD.

23-15-30

4-43

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-8 Menu 3 Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

O: list ORT

I: set all LES id's

Description

Displays all EEPROM parameters, including all cable losses and

LES/GES configurations.

Displays all ORT parameters to the same LES/GES access code and service provider (including primary and secondary service providers).

Certain parameters are set using Menu 3, set CP ORT parameter.

K: set CP ORT parameter Use the ORT parameters to configure parameters for the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal.

T: write defaults to CP ORT Each SDU stores a copy of the User, Secure, and Manufacturer

Specific ORT parameter defaults in its software load.

V: bulletin board satellite data

S: list event log

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal stores the updated satellite longitude from the bulletin board.

Lists all events and system fault codes stored in non-volatile RAM.

When selected, several options are available:

• 0 displays the most recent saved entry.

• S displays next most recent entry saved.

• PERIOD displays all remaining logged entries.

M: misc. EEPROM parameter

G: clear call log

• 1 displays special events (does not include ORR entries).

Enables entry or entry changes to some of the EEPROM parameters listed in function L.

Clears call log files for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

P: ocean region parameter Configures LES access codes (primary and secondary service providers) for individual ORs.

H: list SCM/CP ORT Lists the values contained in both SCM and the CP ORT.

R: copy CP ORT to SCM Copies values stored in the CP ORT to the SCM. This may take several minutes. To indicate progress, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal displays the number of bytes remaining to transfer.

U: clear SCM ORT Clear the ORT parameter from the SCM.

B: list channel card event log Lists the event log for individual channel cards.

For more information about ORT parameters, see "Configuring the Owners

Requirements Table (ORT)" on page 6-1.

Figure 4-5 shows an example Menu 3, Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM

parametersscreen display for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

Table 4-9 describes the items available in Menu 3, Item M.

23-15-30

4-44

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS

1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 21 CARD 2 IP ADDRESS

2 FORWARD ID 22 TRANSMIT IF WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS

3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 29 DEFAULT LATTITUDE

11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 30 DEFAULT LONGITUDE

14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 31 OBEY OXCO STATUS

15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 63 CARD 1 SUBNET MASK

16 TERMINAL CATEGORY 64 CARD 2 SUBNET MASK

20 CARD 1 IP ADDRESS 65 AIR/GROUND BEHAVIOUR

WHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ?

73 CP AUTO ATTACH 90 BGAN/SWIFT64 CONGESTION THRESHOLD

74 CC SBB CIPER PARAMETER 91 BGAN/SWIFT64 AUTO HANDOVER

83 IP HEADER COMPRESSION 95 OVER-POWER MARGIN

84 SW64 POSITION REPORTING 97 CHANNEL CARD CONFIGURATION

85 APAC TEST BEARER LONGITUDE 100 MIN SAT LOOK ANGLE

86 EMEA TEST BEARER LONGITUDE 101 PREEMPTABLE CALLS

87 AMERICAS TEST BEARER LONGITUDE 102 BGAN/SWIFT64 HYSTERESIS TIMEOUT

89 BGAN/SWIFT64 CONGESTION TIMEOUT 103 ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (ROLL)

WHICH PARAMETER # <CTRL> N for next page ?

104 ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (PITCH) 114 MAX ORDER FOR INTERMOD CHECK

105 ANTENNA MOUNTING ANGLE (ROTATION) 115 ENABLE PAP

106 RT-CHANNEL RESERVED POWER 116 PAP USER NAME

108 USWR ERROR THRESHOLD 117 PAP PASSWORD

109 IRS1 TYPE 118 VOICE PROCESSOR IP ADDRESS

110 IRS2 TYPE 119 LNA TO SDU RX THRESHOLD

113 MAXIMUM IGA POWER

Figure 4-5 Menu 3 - Item M: Miscellaneous EEPROM Parameters

Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions

Parameter

Number

Parameter Name

HPA-to-antenna total loss

Forward ID

GPS protection algorithms

Number of channel cards

Front panel LEDs enabled

Description

Defines transmit coaxial cable loss from the HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal at MPC1 to the antenna, including the DLNA loss—maximum is 2.5 dB (includes DLNA loss of 0.8 dB).

The Forward ID is not strapped, therefore you must enter it using this parameter.

Disables the GPS algorithms the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal uses to prevent calls from interfering with the GPS navigational system on the aircraft.

Selects the number of channel cards for which the system is configured. Default is 2.

Future consideration is provided for additional LEDs, beyond the two currently activated—default is 2.

23-15-30

4-45

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Continued)

Parameter

Number

Parameter Name

Maintenance port inverse video

Maintenance port degrees symbol

Description

Enables a selected report to be highlighted in Inverse Video when it is activated—default is 1 (activated).

Offers a choice of displaying the letter D or the degree symbol ° when viewing the lat/long information displayed in the Reports output:

• Select 0 to use the letter D; e.g., 180.0 D.

Terminal category

Card 1 IP address

Card 2 IP address

Transmit if

Weight-on-Wheels

Default latitude

• Select 1 to use a degree symbol °; e.g., 180.0°.

Configure the LRU type. Default is 2 (HW Strapping) — hardware is read on power-up.

IP address of channel card 1.

IP address of channel card 2.

Allows the system to transmit when it is on the ground.

Default longitude

Allows user to enter a default latitude value.

Reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate revised default values.

Allows user to enter a default longitude value.

Reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate revised default values.

Obey OXCO status Prevents system operation until OCXO is warmed up

(unless overridden).

Use parameter setting to override warm-up during testing procedures.

Manufacturer-specific - do not modify. Ch card gateway address

IMEI number

SDU-to-PA gain

Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.

Card 1 subnet address Subnet address of channel card 1.

Card 2 subnet address Subnet address of channel card 2.

Air/ground behavior

#2 IMEI number

#3 IMEI number

#4 IMEI number

CP auto attach

CC SBB cipher parameter

Determines the function of WOW strapping.

Manufacturer-specific - do not modify.

To ensure that the terminal registers on the

SwiftBroadband Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched core network, set this option to CS PS. Network

Registration is essential to access network resources to make calls.

Ciphers the messages between the terminal and the core network.

23-15-30

4-46

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-9 Menu 3, Item M EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Continued)

Parameter

Number

Parameter Name Description

IP Header Compression Turns on IP header compression. Valid values: C (channel card default = Off), 0 (Off), and 4 through 9 (On)

Over Power Margin Do not change.

101

Channel Card

Configuration

Preemptable Calls

Configures channel cards for Swift64, SBB, or classic service.

Configures which calls can be preempted when performing a satellite handover.

102

103

104

105

106

108

109

110

113

115

116

BGAN/SWIFT64

Hysteresis Timeout

Configures the time it will take to perform a satellite handover once a new satellite is visible.

Default is 120.0 SEC.

Antenna Mounting Angle

(Roll)

Configures the physical antenna mounting angle (Roll).

Antenna Mounting Angle

(Pitch)

Configures the physical antenna mounting angle (Pitch).

Antenna Mounting Angle

(Rotation)

Configures the physical antenna mounting angle

(Rotation).

RT Channel Reserved

Power

Do not change.

VSWR Error Threshold Do not change.

IRS1 Type Configures the navigation data type for the ARINC 429 IRS receiver 1.

IRS2 Type Configures the navigation data type for the ARINC 429 IRS receiver 2.

Maximum IGA Power Do not change.

Enable PAP

PAP User Name

Enables PAP authentication. For configuration instructions, refer to the HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide,

MN-1252-13005.

Configures PAP authentication username. Refer to the

HSD Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.

117

118

PAP Password Configures PAP authentication password. Refer to the HSD

Terminal Developer’s Guide, MN-1252-13005.

Do not change.

119

Voice Processor IP

Address

LNA to SDU RX

Threshold

Do not change.

(d) Menu 4

Figure 4-6 shows an example MPU Menu 4 screen display for an HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal. Table 4-10 describes the items available in Menu 4.

23-15-30

4-47

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MENU 4 1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x

Q channel card forward ID's O set Ocean Region

S change spot beam J toggle ISDN connection

M report MUX stats

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-6 Menu 4 Screen Display

Table 4-10 Menu 4 Item Descriptions

Menu Item

Q: channel card forward IDs

Item Description

Enables viewing of ISDN channels 1 and 2 FWD IDs in Swift64 mode, IMSI in SBB mode, and ICAO for the classic channel card.

S: change spot beam

Enables manual selection of specific spot beams independently assigned for each ISDN channel.

M: report MUX stats Not applicable: Used for engineering debugging purposes only.

O: set Ocean

Region

Allows for manual selection of satellite ORs:

AORW:

AORE:

POR:

IOR:

MTSAT:

APAC:

EMEA: 6

AMERICAS: 7

To revert to programmed selection, type -1 , and then press ENTER for AUTO selection.

(e) Menu 10

Menu 10 items are used to manually enter INS or IRS parameters to simulate the data required for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operation when INS or IRS data

is unavailable. Figure 4-7 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU

Menu 10 screen.

23-15-30

4-48

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MENU 10 1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x

A activate IRS simul words X deactivate IRS simul words

F IRS bus #1 L simul IRS lat

G simul IRS long H simul IRS heading

T simul IRS true track P simul IRS pitch

R simul IRS roll S simul IRS speed

Q simul IRS altitude C port ACU status

B sb ACU status M activate antenna status words

N deactivate antenna status words D toggle active antenna

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-7 Menu 10 Screen Display

Table 4-11 describes the items available in Menu 10.

Table 4-11 Menu 10 Item Descriptions

Menu Item

L: simul INS lat

Description

Simulates a latitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.

H: simul INS heading Simulates aircraft heading by overriding the data received from the aircraft

INS.

P: simul INS pitch Simulates aircraft pitch by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.

S: simul INS speed Simulates aircraft speed by overriding the data received from the aircraft

INS.

A: activate INS simul words

Activates all input simulate parameters, overriding the INS data received from the aircraft.

Lat and Long values from the EEPROM values set in Menu 3.

Enter the starboard antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.

B: simul sb ACU status

N: deactivate antenna status words

De-activates all set antenna status words.

X: deactivate INS simul words

G: simul INS/IRS long

De-activates all simulated parameters reverting the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal back to using the INS data received from the aircraft.

Simulates aircraft longitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft

INS.

T: simul INS/IRS true track

Simulates true track by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.

R: simul INS roll

C: simul port ACU status

Simulates aircraft roll by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS.

Q: simul INS altitude Simulates aircraft altitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft

INS.

Enter both the port antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz.

23-15-30

4-49

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-11 Menu 10 Item Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item

M: activate antenna status words

D: toggle active antenna

F: IRS bus #1

Description

Activates all set antenna status words.

Changes the current simulated active antenna. Choose starboard, port, or automatic. Note that this change will only take effect if antenna status words are activated using menu item M.

Do not change

(f) Menu 13

Menu 13 items are used to query and debug the data I/O card.

Figure 4-8 shows an example Menu 13 screen display. Table 4-12 describes the

items available in Menu 13.

MENU 13 1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x

T query DATA IO elapsed time V query DATA IO version

S query DATA IO services D DATA IO test

F DATA IO fault logging level X DATA IO console mode

G print DATA IO call database Y disable output to DATA I/O

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-8 Menu 13 Screen Display

Table 4-12 Menu 13 Item Descriptions

Menu Item

T: query DATA IO elapsed time

S: query DATA IO services Displays active interfaces.

Description

Displays the time (in seconds) since the last data I/O reset.

F: DATA IO fault logging level

G: print DATA IO call database

Sets the level of minimum severity of events that are reported to the data I/O card.

Displays the calls made and recorded in the data I/O database.

V: query DATA IO version Displays the firmware version of the data I/O card.

D: DATA IO test Tests individual interfaces of the data I/O.

X: DATA IO console mode Opens a virtual TTY session to the data I/O maintenance port on the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

Y: disable output to DATA

I/O

Disables output to data I/O from control processor.

23-15-30

4-50

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(g) Menu 14

Menu 14 items are used only by professional installers for debugging and clarifying call routing issues.

Figure 4-9 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 14 screen display. Table 4-13 describes some of the items available in Menu 14.

MENU 14 1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x

N num entries in call table L list call table

T get call table E list eeprom call mapping edits

G modify eeprom call mapping edits

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-9 Menu 14 Screen Display

Menu Item

Table 4-13 Menu 14 Item Descriptions

Item Description

G: modify eeprom call mapping edits

Do not change.

E: list eeprom call mapping edits

Do not change.

(h) Menu 15

Figure 4-10 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 15 screen

display.

Table 4-14 describes the items available in Menu 15.

MENU 15 1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x

V request channel card versions D channel card serial number

B channel card RSSI mode G A_TI query

W request burst counter

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-10 Menu 15 Screen Display

23-15-30

4-51

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-14 Menu 15 Item Descriptions

Menu Item

V: request channel card versions

Item Description

Displays software versions for a selected channel card.

B: channel card RSSI mode

Places the channel card in Received Signal Strength Indicator mode.

As requested, enter the channel number, the OR, the channel type, and the RSSI period in milliseconds.

W: request burst counter

Displays the burst counter information.

D: channel card serial number

Displays the serial number of the selected channel card.

G: A_TI query Manually sends an A_TI query to the requested channel card to check on the alive/dead status of the channel card processors.

As requested, enter a channel card number and service type to query.

(i) Menu 21

Figure 4-11 shows an example Menu 21 screen display.

Table 4-15 describes some of the items available in Menu 21.

MENU 21 1252-A-3800-01 FIRMWARE Vx.x

P get channel card ethernet parms I get channel card IMEI number

B request SBB configuration L list spotbeam table

G logoff SBB spotbeam N GPS-assisted IRS data

Q query channel card flashprom Y activate ZB burst status

J inquire for spot beam map

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-11 Menu 21 Screen Display

Table 4-15 Menu 21 Item Descriptions

Menu Item

P: get channel card ethernet parms

Item Description

Displays the Ethernet parameters of the channel card, including the

MAC address, the IP address, the gateway IP address, the host name, the DHCP status, and the DHCP server IP address.

Displays the SwiftBroadband configuration.

B: request SBB configuration

I: get channel card IMEI key Displays the IMEI key of the channel card.

N: GPS-assisted IRS data Displays the GPS-assisted precision configuration for SBB.

23-15-30

4-52

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(j) Menu 30

Figure 4-12 shows an example HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Menu 30 screen

display.

Table 4-16 describes some of the items available in Menu 30.

NOTE: For more information about PIM testing, refer to "Passive

Intermodulation (PIM) Test" on page 3-16.

MENU 30 FIRMWARE Vx.x GND

L list PIMBIT parameters M initiate manual PIMBIT

F fakeout PIMBIT parameters P initiate/stop PIMBIT

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

Figure 4-12 Menu 30 Screen Display

Table 4-16 Menu 30 Item Descriptions

Menu Item

L: list PIMBIT parameters

Item Description

List the parameters used during PIM testing including transmit and receive channel frequencies.

Start the manual PIM test. Do not use.

M: initiate manual

PIMBIT

N: initiate/stop PIMBIT Start the automatic PIM test.

(6) Report Descriptions

When testing or troubleshooting the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, monitoring real-time

system data is sometimes required. Figure 4-13 shows all the reports potentially

available to a Level 2 user.

Most reports are used for factory debugging purposes only. This document describes only the reports typically used in the field for operational and fault isolation testing.

NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed, the MPU reports that appear

may differ from those shown as an example in Figure 4-13.

23-15-30

4-53

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

1 OFF OFF messages to card #1 13 OFF messages to card #2

2 OFF OFF hex output to card #1 14 OFF hex output to card #2

3 OFF OFF responses from card #1 15 OFF responses from card #2

4 OFF OFF hex input from card #1 16 OFF hex input from card #2

5 OFF OFF card #1 misc info 17 OFF card #2 misc info

6 OFF sb antenna arinc input 18 OFF port antenna arinc input

7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word 19 OFF port antenna maintenance word

8 OFF sb antenna status word 20 OFF port antenna status word

9 OFF channel card call status 21 OFF call codes

10 OFF channel card THA codes 22 OFF spot beam selection

11 OFF channel card errors 23 OFF standard output

12 OFF IRS input 24 OFF doppler, antenna az/el

Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off

X turn off all reports <CTRL> N show next page S save to EEPROM

ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU

25 OFF HPA arinc i/o 39 OFF combined-mode debugging

27 OFF HPA/channel card backoffs 40 OFF enthusiastic combined-mode debug

28 OFF miscellaneous digital inputs 41 OFF delta combined-mode debugging

29 OFF channel card A_AM msgs 43 OFF sdu path cable calibration

30 OFF multi-control arinc bus 44 OFF hpa calibration (gain droop)

31 OFF ocean region info 45 OFF combined mode ocean region debug

32 OFF hex input from data i/o 46 OFF hpa resets

33 OFF hex output to data i/o 47 OFF channel card temperature

34 OFF input from data i/o 48 OFF hexadecimal IRS input

35 OFF changes in multi-control bus 49 OFF main loop latency

36 OFF unit test call setup 50 OFF main loop timing

38 OFF combined-mode power allotment 51 OFF one second tick

Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off

X turn off all reports <CTRL> N show next page S save to EEPROM

ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU

52 OFF extended call codes 76 OFF HSD-X arinc messages

54 OFF multi-control time and date 77 OFF HSD-X net configuration

60 OFF OFF debug channel card power 78 OFF vt100 eirp/power

61 OFF non-zero channel card power 79 OFF dialtone debugging

62 OFF m4 availability status 86 OFF Channel card rx attenuation

64 OFF channel card frequencies 87 OFF interworking report

65 OFF enthusiastic messages from HPA 89 OFF debug call teardown

66 OFF channel card boot sequence 91 OFF HSD frequencies

67 OFF debug honeywell combined mode 92 OFF intermod debugging

68 OFF CFDS debugging 93 OFF spot beam debugging

69 OFF vt100 scenario 94 OFF vt100 channel card info

72 OFF DATA I/O events 95 OFF vt100 debugging

Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off

X turn off all reports <CTRL> N show next page S save to EEPROM

ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU

23-15-30

4-54

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

96 OFF IRS data rate 118 OFF channel card rf loopback

107 OFF unusual channel card msgs 119 OFF I2C controller i/o

108 OFF channel card rf pwr detect 120 OFF I2C controller hex i/o

109 OFF channel card power SU's 121 OFF I2C slave status

110 OFF underdraft debugging 122 OFF I2C miscellaneous input

111 OFF miscellaneous digital outputs 123 OFF enthusiastic backoff

112 OFF arinc labels 124 OFF PA mute debugging

113 OFF channel card sw loads 125 OFF PA BITE status

114 OFF all channel card THA codes 126 OFF calibrated power detectors

115 OFF OCXO state toggles 127 OFF power supply dc current

116 OFF DATA I/O passthrough mode 128 OFF VSWR monitoring

117 OFF output to data i/o (ascii) 129 OFF I2C output to PA

Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off

X turn off all reports <CTRL> N show next page S save to EEPROM

ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU

130 OFF misc temperatures 143 OFF next W'burg LDU

131 OFF duart channel hex input 144 OFF W'burg state changes

133 OFF LES access codes 145 OFF all input from CMU (hex)

134 OFF MCDU/WSC #1 arinc input 146 OFF periodic messages from CMU

135 OFF MCDU/WSC #2 arinc input 147 OFF arinc hex output to CMU

136 OFF arinc output to MCDU/WSC 148 OFF USIM heater control

137 OFF MCDU/WSC state machine 149 OFF AERO logging text -- no SU

138 OFF ascii digital inputs 150 OFF ACARS P-channel RX data

139 OFF W'burg messages to CMU 151 OFF all AERO SUs

140 OFF W'burg messages from CMU (hex) 152 OFF AERO msg acks

141 OFF W'burg messages from CMU 154 OFF non-periodic msgs to aero card

142 OFF lo-level W'burg labels from CMU 155 OFF AES status table queries

Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off

X turn off all reports <CTRL> N show next page S save to EEPROM

ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU

156 OFF MCDU driver errors 168 OFF channel card reset cycles

157 OFF ADC raw values 169 OFF CMC arinc in

158 OFF classic AERO call progress 170 OFF CMC arinc out

159 OFF AES status 171 OFF WSC data structs

160 OFF AERO SUs for this terminal 172 OFF CMC data structs

161 OFF 1252-A-3400 status 173 OFF vt100 CUG info

162 OFF vt100 mcdu 174 OFF BGAN registrations

163 OFF periodic messages to CMU 175 OFF Alt Discrete status

164 OFF enthusiastic digital inputs 176 OFF CP/SCM ORT I/O

165 OFF 615 data loader upgrades 178 OFF power bursts

166 OFF 615 data loader debugging 179 OFF channel card burst stats

167 OFF max 615 debugging 180 OFF channel card burst trace

23-15-30

4-55

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Enter 1 thru 203 to toggle report on/off

X turn off all reports <CTRL> N show next page S save to EEPROM

ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU

181 OFF data i/o call reports 194 OFF PA reset cycles

182 OFF recovery after BGAN inert 195 OFF sys table protection algorithm

183 OFF debug CC#1 rx parser 199 OFF classic AERO call status

184 OFF debug CC#2 rx parser 202 OFF CFDS pages sent to CMC

185 OFF dio / cc call matchup 203 OFF generic HD710 faults

187 OFF antenna steering OLS labels

188 OFF over-power protection algorithm 1 OFF OFF messages to card #1

189 OFF expanded IRS input 2 OFF OFF hex output to card #1

190 OFF miscellaneous debugging 3 OFF OFF responses from card #1

191 OFF WSCI telephony 4 OFF OFF hex input from card #1

192 OFF CMU status words 5 OFF OFF card #1 misc info

193 OFF output to antenna controller 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input

Figure 4-13 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU Reports

(7) Activating Maintenance Reports

To automatically generate report 23 (standard output) in Level 1 menu access, press the EQUAL SIGN. The report data output is repeated on the computer display at one-second intervals.

Level 2 maintenance access provides more flexibility in the use of the reports function. This access level permits the activation or deactivation of any one of the reports (toggle on and off).

(a) Reports General Guidelines

• To open the report menu, press EQUAL SIGN.

• To activate a report, type the number of the report needed, and then press

ENTER. This toggles on the report number entered. To toggle the report off, type the report number again, and then press ENTER.

• To disable all reports (toggles all reports off), press X.

• To display the next group of reports, press CTRL+N.

• To save all selected reports to EEPROM, press S. The selected reports will then be output automatically when the maintenance port is accessed. If the items selected are not saved, they are de-activated when the system is reset or power is cycled to the terminal.

• To start the scrolling report display, press ESC (in Level 2 access only). To return to the menu selection screen, press ESC again.

(b) Report Descriptions

Not all the reports are used in the testing or troubleshooting of the system. This section describes only the more commonly used reports.

23-15-30

4-56

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

1. Reports 23 and 94

Report 23 is the most comprehensive report, giving a general impression of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal health. An example of the contents of report

23 is shown in Figure 4-14. Table 4-17 provides an example and a brief

description of the parameters. Each distinct parameter is numbered for description purposes.

The output of report 23 scrolls continuously on screen and disrupts other items on screen. Report 94 provides identical information that does not disrupt other items on screen.

18:42:31 dop **** az 0.0 deg el 45.0 deg ant gain 12.0 (p/t)

CHAN #1: C/No=40.6 dB Hz sig=-42.4 dB 39.0 C no dial beam=255

CHAN #2: C/No=40.7 dB Hz sig=-41.4 dB 39.0 C no dial beam=255

CHAN #3: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= 0.0 dB 38.0 C log off beam=0

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 39.0 C no call beam=0

44D0'0.3"N 74D51'8.8"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 83.9D TK 0.0D 0 knots ********

Figure 4-14 Example Report 23 Output

Report 23 Text

18:42:31 dop **** az 0.0 deg el 45.0 deg ant gain 12.0 (p/t)

CHAN #1:

C/No=40.6 dB Hz sig=-42.4 dB

39.0 C no dial beam=255

44D0'0.3"N

74D51'8.8"W

PT 0.0D

RL 0.0D

Table 4-17 Report 23 Item Descriptions

Description

Time based on the system real time clock

Doppler frequency offset; increases with velocity (see note below)

Antenna azimuth pointing to the satellite, with respect to the nose of the aircraft

Antenna elevation angle to the satellite, with respect to the horizontal position of the aircraft

Reported antenna gain for the selected antenna: starboard (sbd) or port

(p/t)

Indicates the channel card for which results 14 to 17 relate

RF input Carrier-to-Noise (C/No) level; typically 50.0 to 55.0

RF input signal level; not to exceed 0 when in-call

Note: The signal level for channels 1, 2, 3,4, and 5 may be different.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal internal LRU temperature

Note: Operating the terminal above 55C is not recommended.

System call status

Satellite beam on which the card is registered

IRS lat/long as interpreted by the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Aircraft pitch angle, where UP is positive

Aircraft roll angle, where clockwise is positive

23-15-30

4-57

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Report 23 Text

HD 83.9D

TK 0.0D

0 knots

Table 4-17 Report 23 Item Descriptions (Continued)

Description

Aircraft true heading; where the nose of the aircraft is pointing, based on yaw offset

Aircraft true track; direction the aircraft is flying—not necessarily the direction it is pointing (see note below)

Aircraft velocity

NOTE: When the aircraft is stationary, the field may appear as a series of asterisks (*).

2. Reports 5 and 17

Report 5 displays information for channel card 1, and report 17 displays information for channel card 2.

These reports are commonly used for testing and troubleshooting the system and are only available to Level 2, maintenance access users.

You are prompted to select the channel(s) for which to generate a report:

5 WHICH GAN CHANNEL (1,2,B,X) ?

Figure 4-15 Prompt to Select Channel for Report Generation

The options are:

• 1 for channel 1

• 2 for channel 2

• B for both channels

• X to deselect all channels

In report 17 for channel card 2, you can select channel 3, channel 4, both channels, or deselect all channels.

NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the user's selection of reports, the MPU reports displayed may differ from those

shown in the example in Figure 4-16.

CHAN #3: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= 0.0 dB log off beam=0 bt=OK oc=NA

tx 0 Hz burst 0 38.0 C int=8080

Figure 4-16 Example of Report 17, Channel Card 2, Channel 3

3. Reports 8 and 20

Report 8 displays the status of the starboard antenna, and report 20 displays the status of the port antenna.

23-15-30

4-58

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

These reports are commonly used for testing and troubleshooting the system and are only available to Level 2, maint access users.

NOTE: Depending on the version of software installed and the user's selection of reports, the MPU reports displayed may differ from those

shown in the example in Figure 4-17.

port status $608033 SDI: ACU SSM: NORMAL gain=12.0

OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active HGA LNA=on

Figure 4-17 Example of Report 20

Table 4-18 shows descriptions of the items in reports 8 and 20.

Report 8 and 20

(Hex code) -

(SDI) -

(SSM) -

(Gain) -

(Mode) -

(LNA) -

Table 4-18 Reports 8 and 20 Item Descriptions

Starboard and Port Antenna Status

Raw hex code of the 32-bit ARINC word—decoded message follows code

Antenna being used (for mechanically steered, only Port data is valid)

Antenna serviceability

Reported antenna gain (may vary with increased blockage or keyhole pointing)

Reports tracking status, antenna selection, and high gain mode

Power-on status

4. Report 21

Report 21 displays the call code information for the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal.

Figure 4-18 shows an example of report 21. Table 4-19 describes the items

in report 21.

23:48:36 #1 123ABC E4 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

41.5 C 51 dB Hz

23:48:39 #1 123ABC E4 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 41.5 C 51 dB Hz

23:49:20 #2 456DEF E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

41.5 C 52 dB Hz

23:49:24 #2 456DEF E5 stop 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 41.5 C 51 dB Hz

23:49:27 #2 456DEF E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

41.5 C 52 dB Hz

23:49:32 #2 456DEF E5 stop 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 41.5 C 51 dB Hz

23:49:36 #2 456DEF E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

41.5 C 51 dB Hz

23:49:40 #2 456DEF E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 41.5 C 52 dB Hz

Figure 4-18 Example Report 21

23-15-30

4-59

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-19 Report 21 Item Descriptions

Report 21

(Time) -

Call Codes

Time based on the system real time clock

(Fwd Addr) Forward address ID assigned to the system channel cards

(Alpha/no.) OR and beam the card is logged on to

(Call) -

Call real-time status, service type code, and Inmarsat Cause Code (see Appendix

H: Inmarsat Cause Codes on page H-1)

(RF power) LES/GES requested HPA power in dBW

(OR status) OR registration status

(Call orig)

(Call type)

Call originating from MES or from a fixed location

Call types (for example, speech)

D. Inmarsat Cause Codes

The fault definitions that appear in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal maintenance menu

logs are based directly on the cause code definitions provided by Inmarsat. Appendix H:

Inmarsat Cause Codes on page H-1 defines the maintenance port menu fault codes of

the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures

You can perform all test procedures presented in this section to test the total operational status of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. You can conduct these operational tests for all terminals returned to service after repair.

The procedures assume that the technical personnel are familiar with the test equipment used and can operate the equipment to produce the required inputs and obtain the required results (indications). Refer to the detailed operating procedures and descriptions of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU included in this section.

CAUTION: ONLY AUTHORIZED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL WHO ARE TRAINED IN

GENERAL AVIATION WORKMANSHIP AND HAVE A BASIC

UNDERSTANDING OF SATCOM SYSTEMS SHOULD PERFORM THE

OPERATIONAL AND DIAGNOSTIC TEST PROCEDURES IN THIS

MANUAL.

23-15-30

4-60

3 JUN 10

Step

1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

CAUTION: CHANGES TO DEFAULT VALUES FOR SOME MENU FUNCTIONS MAY

SERIOUSLY DEGRADE SYSTEM OPERATION.

NOTE: This manual describes the basic MPU functions, menus, and reports required for the testing and fault isolation procedures presented in this section. Please consult Honeywell Product Support before entering any unfamiliar menu selections not described in this manual.

NOTE: Using a terminal emulation program, open a log file and save all test results for future reference and test records.

NOTE: The procedures presented in this section aid technical personnel in upgrading, maintaining, or troubleshooting an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Maintenance does not imply lubrication or adjustment activities.

Refer to the Outline and Installation diagrams and the Interconnection and Contact

Assignment drawings presented in "Installation" on page 3-1 for additional information.

(1) Test Setup Procedure

The test setup procedure is presented in Table 4-20. For detailed connection of test

equipment and operating instructions for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, see

"Terminal Maintenance Port Utility" on page 4-36

Table 4-20 Test Setup Procedure

Action

Make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is powered down and disconnected from the power source.

Connect a maintenance cable to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front-panel or remote maintenance port connector.

Connect the other end of the cable to the serial port of the computer.

Open a log file to capture all test data.

Step

1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

(2) Post Test

When testing is completed, follow the steps in Table 4-21.

Table 4-21 Post Test Procedure

Action

Save the log file of the test results (or data) for future reference.

Remove power from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal that was tested and from all other test equipment.

Disconnect test equipment from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

Replace the maintenance-port connector cover (if it was removed during the test setup).

23-15-30

4-61

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(3) Installation and Operational Verification Tests

The test procedures assume that an approved ARINC 741 compatible antenna subsystem has been completely installed and tested as per the manufacturer's instructions.

To facilitate and document the installation of the equipment, refer to "Installation

Checklist" on page E-1.

(a) Pre Power-up Checks

Carry out all mechanical and electrical verification tests in the systematic order presented in this document.

(b) Mechanical Verification

Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed mechanical information.

Table 4-22 itemizes recommended mechanical checks.

STEP

1. 0

2. 0

3. 0

Table 4-22 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Mechanical Verification

Item Checked

Mounting tray

Physical placement

Fan tray

ARINC 600 connector

Verification Description

Make sure that service/maintenance ports are accessible.

Check that environmental characteristics and specifications are met, including cooling, air-flow, and pressure

Confirm plug configuration is correct.

Check chassis bonding.

Make sure that fan rotation is unobstructed and rotates freely.

Check polarized pins.

Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed electrical information. Table 4-23

itemizes the recommended electrical checks.

When conducting the following tests, do not rack the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT

DAMAGE, USE EXTREME CAUTION DURING THE VOLTAGE

LEVEL MEASUREMENTS.

STEP

1.0

Table 4-23 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist

Item Checked Verification Description

Power connections 28 V dc polarity or 115 V ac polarity

Chassis ground @ BP8—resistance measurement

23-15-30

4-62

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-23 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Electrical Verification Checklist (Continued)

STEP

2.0

Item Checked

Voltage levels

Verification Description

CAUTION: WHEN POWER IS APPLIED TO THE RACK, THE

FAN ENERGIZES.

3.0

4.0

IRS Input

Configuration

Strap Pins

Check voltage levels:

28 V dc: between BP2 (positive) and BP3 (return) or

115 V ac: between BPI (115-H) and BP7 (115-C)

IRS wiring:

Inertial system wired to TP4J (A) and TP4K (B)

IRS format:

ARINC 429 Interface

SDI:

Strapped for HGA, Pin TP5B to TP5D

System configuration:

Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10

ICAO ID:

User specific address obtained from the aircraft registration

WOW: optional

5.0

6.0

7.0

8.0

Ethernet 1 and 2 Wired or strapped to RJ45 distribution points

Optional—other service may be preferred

ISDN 1 Wired or strapped to RJ45 distribution points

Optional—other service may be preferred

CEPT-E1

Remotes

(optional but recommended)

Wired to CTU - optional

Remote reset switch

Maintenance port, remote access

Power and fault indicators

9.0

RF coaxial Rx input cable loss from DLNA J2 to HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal at

BP12

Tx output cable loss from HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal at MPC1 to

DLNA J3

10.0

Multi-control and

BITE from antenna subsystem

Antenna manufacturer and model

Multi-Control loopbacks installed at TP3E and TP3F

(4) Configuration Parameters Verification

You can verify the system configuration parameters. For additional connection and

access information, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37. Verify and

document the parameters using the lists in "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.

23-15-30

4-63

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(a) Parameter Verification Procedure

• From Menu 3, press H (list SCM/CP ORT), and then press 1 (CP EEPROM

ORT).

The ORT listing appears on the screen, as shown in Figure 4-19. Verify that the

correct system configuration parameters are listed in the ORT.

23-15-30

4-64

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

0 lists SCM ORT -- 1 lists CP EEPROM ORT -- 2 lists CP ORT OPTIONS ?

CP EEPROM ORT: ID A8E09293 VERSION 30026

4-WIRE #1 NOISE LEVEL: -50 SET BY MCDU

4-WIRE #1 SPEAKER LEVEL: 50 SET BY MAINT PORT

4-WIRE #1 MIC LEVEL: 70 SET BY MAINT PORT

4-WIRE #1 SIDETONE LEVEL: 50 SET BY MCDU

4-WIRE #2 NOISE LEVEL: -50 SET BY MAINT PORT

4-WIRE #2 SPEAKER LEVEL: 50 SET BY MAINT PORT

4-WIRE #2 MIC LEVEL: 70 SET BY MAINT PORT

4-WIRE #2 SIDETONE LEVEL: 50 SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU TYPE: HONEYWELL NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

HSD SAL: 307 SET BY MAINT PORT

LOG-ON/HANDOVER POLICY: MANUAL NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

HIGH RATE R/T IN GLOBAL BEAM: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

RESPONSE TO LOG-ON INTERROGATION: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

CMU INPUTS SPEED SELECT: LOW RATE SET BY MAINT PORT

FORWARD ID: 123ABC NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

AIR/GROUND STATUS RESTRICTIONS: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

HSD (HPA) - ANTENNA LOSS: 2.5 dB SET BY MAINT PORT

HIT 'H' for MORE

MAINT CMD EXECUTION IN AIR: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

TRANSMIT ON GROUND: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU/WSCI #1 WIRED: YES SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU/WSCI #2 WIRED: YES SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU/WSCI #3 WIRED: NO SET BY MAINT PORT

CMU #1 WIRED: YES SET BY MAINT PORT

CMU #2 WIRED: NO NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

A/C GNSS EQUIPMENT: GPS SET BY MAINT PORT

PRIMARY IRS TYPE: INERTIAL SET BY MAINT PORT

SECONDARY IRS TYPE: AES ID NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

CMC TYPE: BOEING SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU/WSCI CONTROLLER TYPE: MCDU SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU/WSCI INPUT SPEED: LOW RATE SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU/WSCI OUTPUT SPEED: LOW RATE NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

SECONDARY IRS INPUT SPEED SELECT: HIGH RATE SET BY MAINT PORT

COCKPIT CALL SIGNALLING MODE: CD1/CD2 DISCRETE NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

INSTALLED DIPLEXER TYPE: TYPE F SET BY MAINT PORT

HIT 'H' for MORE

ANTENNA TYPE: ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT SET BY MAINT PORT

ALLOW MANUAL DIAL: ENABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

SELF-TEST IN AIR: ENABLED NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

ANTENNA MOUNTING ROTATION ANGLE: 0.0 deg SET BY MAINT PORT

ANTENNA MOUNTING PITCH ANGLE: 0.0 deg SET BY MAINT PORT

ANTENNA MOUNTING ROLL ANGLE: 0.0 deg SET BY MAINT PORT

CMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL: NO NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

MCDU PAST: ENABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

CMU-SDU JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION: PERIODIC SET BY MAINT PORT

NUMBER CG-710 INSTALLED: 0 SET BY MAINT PORT

NUMBER CR-710 INSTALLED: 0 SET BY MAINT PORT

CARD #1 SBB/S64 PRIORITY: "SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64" SET BY MAINT PORT

SWIFTBROADBAND TIMING MODE: NOT ASSISTED SET BY MAINT PORT

SW FIELD LOADABLE: ENABLED NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

SERVICE TYPE PRIORITY: PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE SET BY MAINT PORT

CEPT E1 WIRED: YES SET BY MAINT PORT

CMC WIRED: YES NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

HIT 'H' for MORE

CMC MASK FAULT: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

MASK POSITION IN LOGS: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

ICAO CODE SOURCE: STRAP SET BY MAINT PORT

CMU OUTPUT SPEED SELECT: LOW RATE SET BY MAINT PORT

POTS SERVICE: ENABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

CEPT E1 INTERFACE TYPE: ARINC 746 SET BY MAINT PORT

GROUND TO COCKPIT CALL ROUTING PREFERENCE: 4-WIRE #2 NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

GROUND PUBLIC ROUTING PREFERENCE: COCKPIT NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

4-WIRE #2 WIRED: YES NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

ETHERNET #1 WIRED: NO NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

ETHERNET #2 WIRED: YES SET BY MAINT PORT

23-15-30

4-65

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MCDU FONT COLOUR: ENABLED NOT DEFAULT SET BY MAINT PORT

COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL SIGNALING: DISABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL PRE-SELECT: ENABLED SET BY MAINT PORT

PIMBIT AZIMUTH OFFSET ANGLES: SET BY MAINT PORT

HGA = 11.0 DEG NOT DEFAULT

IGA = 15.0 DEG NOT DEFAULT

PIMBIT IGA ELEVATION ANGLES: SET BY MAINT PORT

ANGLE 1 = 18.0 DEG NOT DEFAULT

ANGLE 2 = 12.5 DEG NOT DEFAULT

PIMBIT HGA ELEVATION ANGLES: SET BY MAINT PORT

ANGLE 1 = 27.6 DEG NOT DEFAULT

ANGLE 2 = 12.5 DEG NOT DEFAULT

HIT 'H' for MORE

PIMBIT TEST CRITERIA: SET BY MAINT PORT

MEASUREMENT DISCARD RATIO = 25.5% NOT DEFAULT

FAILURE THRESHOLD = 25.5 dB NOT DEFAULT

POINTING FAILURE THRESHOLD = 255 NOT DEFAULT

HIT 'H' for MORE

DIO BLOCK: 86 BYTES -- TYPE 1 CRC D3CD

de 8e 6a 67 00 50 de 96 e9 74 00 39 1c b6 5b b5 ..jg.P...t.9..[.

0c 8f 09 6e 1c d2 5b 2e de 92 88 f0 00 09 0c 96 ...n..[.........

e8 62 87 a2 fc f4 79 de ce eb 70 00 0e ac d3 2c .b....y...p....,

29 c0 a8 00 05 9b d3 2c 30 00 a1 de 82 6d 30 00 )......,0....m0.

04 1c d2 69 6e de c3 0b e5 00 0b c7 86 3b ad 06 ...in........;..

44 61 74 61 49 4f DataIO

ETHERNET 1 ADDRESS 192.168.0.1

ETHERNET 1 MASK 255.255.255.0

ETHERNET 2 ADDRESS 0.0.0.0

ETHERNET 2 MASK 255.255.255.0

DHCP CLIENT DISABLED

HOST NAME DataIO

DHCP SERVER DISABLED

START OF MANAGED RANGE 192.168.0.100

SNMP SERVER ENABLED

SNMP COMMUNITY STRING public

NUMBER OF MANAGED ADDRESSES 50

TFTP SERVER DISABLED

ETHERNET DUPLEX MODE 0

TELNET ACCESS ENABLED

ALLOW SCPC SESSIONS TRUE

ALLOW MPDS SESSIONS TRUE

ALLOW BGAN SESSIONS TRUE

ACCESS CONCENTRATOR NAME DataIO

DEFAULT PPPOE SERVICE PacketData

ACCESS POINT NAME

AT WELCOME MESSAGE

HIT 'H' for MORE

VP BLOCK: MISSING

TOOL VERSION = XXXX

TOOL NAME = EMBEDDED ORT TOOL

TOOL PART NUMBER = jaytool

SECURE ORT PART NUMBER = sss123

USER ORT PART NUMBER = uuu456

SATELLITE TABLE:

REGION 0: AORW (W) 52.0W CLASSIC AERO SWIFT64

REGION 1: AORE (E) 15.5W CLASSIC AERO SWIFT64

REGION 2: POR (P) 178.0E CLASSIC AERO SWIFT64

REGION 3: IOR (I) 64.0E CLASSIC AERO SWIFT64

REGION 4: MTSAT (4) 142.5E CLASSIC AERO

REGION 5: APAC (5) 143.5E CLASSIC AERO BGAN

REGION 6: EMEA (6) 25.0E CLASSIC AERO BGAN

REGION 7: AMERICAS (7) 98.0W CLASSIC AERO BGAN

23-15-30

4-66

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

LES INFORMATION:

AORW: LES 2 NETWORK ID 0 LES 2

AORE: LES 2 NETWORK ID 0 NO NAME

POR: LES 2 NETWORK ID 0 NO NAME

IOR: LES 2 NETWORK ID 0 NO NAME

SATELLITE FREQUENCY TABLE:

REGION 0: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $3702,$6B8 NCS FREQS: $24EC,$4EC

REGION 1: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $36FE,$6B6 NCS FREQS: $2504,$B60

REGION 2: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $36B4,$700 NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF

REGION 3: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $36B2,$6FC NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF

REGION 4: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF AERO PSID FREQS: $38F7,$8F7 NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF

REGION 5: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $2AF2,$2A AERO PSID FREQS: $36DA,$6DA NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF REGION 6:

GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $2BA0,$9E AERO PSID FREQS: $36DE,$6DE NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF

REGION 7: GLOBAL BEAM FREQS: $2A4C,$4 AERO PSID FREQS: $36DC,$6DC NCS FREQS: $FFFF,$FFFF

HIT 'H' for MORE

GES PRIORITY TABLE:

ENTRY #1 AORW Aussaguel (GES 5) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #2 AORW Eik (GES 2) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #3 AORE Aussaguel (GES 103) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #4 AORE Eik (GES 104) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #5 POR Perth (GES 205) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #6 POR Santa Paula (GES 202) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #7 IOR Perth (GES 305) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #8 IOR Eik (GES 301) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #9 APAC Hawaii (GES 120) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #10 EMEA Fucino (GES 220) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #11 AMERICAS Hawaii (GES 320) PRIORITY 5

ENTRY #12 MTSAT Kobe (GES 161) PRIORITY 5

PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 1 (CATEGORY01):

95 AAAAB 0016135919208 OP-LO

96 JJJJJJ 666666 OP-LO

97 CCCC 5555 OP-LO

98 QQQQQQ 55555555 NON-OP

99 ALPHATEXT 999999 OP-LO

100 DDDDD 99999 OP-LO

PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 2 (CATEGORY02):

91 HHHHH 22222 OP-LO

92 KKKKKK 11111 OP-LO

94 BBBA 22222 OP-LO

95 CCCC 9999 OP-LO

96 AAAAB 11111 OP-LO

97 LLLLL 33333 OP-LO

98 AAAAA 22222 OP-LO

99 AAAA 66666 OP-LO

100 01-NUM IN CAT2 0116135601122 OP-HI

PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 3 (CATEGORY03):

96 BBBBB 88888 OP-LO

97 AAAAC 2222 OP-LO

98 BBBBA 22222 OP-LO

99 AAAAA 22222 OP-LO

100 01-NUM IN CAT3 0116135601123 OP-LO

PHONE BOOK CATEGORY 4 (CATEGORY04):

95 AAAAAB 77777 OP-LO

96 CCCCC 11114 OP-LO

97 AAAAC 33333 OP-LO

99 AAAA 5555 OP-LO

100 01-NUM IN CAT4 0116135601124 NON-OP

DONE

Figure 4-19 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal ORT Display Example

23-15-30

4-67

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(5) System Power-up Checks

NOTE: Before proceeding, make sure that all pre power-up, mechanical, and electrical verifications have been successfully performed and documented

using "Installation Checklist" on page E-1.

(a) Preparation

The following tests serve primarily to confirm proper system power-up; therefore, they can be performed while the aircraft is still in the hangar. Make sure that a computer is available for testing.

(b) Initial Visual LED Verification

The system's Power On and Fault LEDs provide a visual status indication on the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front panel and on the optional remote panel.

To visually verify LEDs:

1. Verify that the LED indicators (at both locations) repeatedly cycle on/off when power is applied.

2. Once the cycle has completed (~5 seconds), verify that the LED power indicator remains illuminated.

With the computer connected and configured to accept maintenance port data, power-up the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, and verify the initial power-up screen

displays, as shown in Figure 4-20.

23-15-30

4-68

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

KERNEL V1.7 -- Wed Mar 24 13:09:23 2010

TESTING RAM ......RAM OK.

CONFIDENTIAL PROPERTY OF EMS TECHNOLOGIES CANADA, LTD.

USE AND DISTRIBUTION LIMITED SOLELY TO AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL.

The use, disclosure, reproduction, modification, transfer or transmittal of this work for any purpose, in any form, or by any means without the written permission of EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. is strictly prohibited.

HSD APPLICATION V22.006 -- Wed Apr 07 10:01:30 2010

CMC INTERFACE: SUPPORTED WSC INTERFACE: SUPPORTED

VALIDATING DETECTOR CALIBRATION TABLES.... OK

VALIDATING ATTENUATOR CALIBRATION TABLE AT $608000.... OK

RAM RUN-TIME DATABASE

OCEAN REGION SAT LONG LES ID TNID SERVICES

**W AORW (region #0) 54.0W 2 0 SW64/AERO

**E AORE (region #1) 15.0W 2 0 SW64/AERO

**P POR (region #2) 178.5E 2 0 SW64/AERO

**I IOR (region #3) 64.5E 2 0 SW64/AERO

**4 MTSAT (region #4) 142.5E AERO

**5 APAC (region #5) 144.0E AERO/SBB

**6 EMEA (region #6) 25.5E AERO/SBB

**7 AMERICAS (region #7) 97.5W AERO/SBB

** LONGITUDE UPDATED FROM AERO BULLETIN BOARDS

REAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 12:50:18 Wed Jan 2, 2001

FORWARD ID TABLE -- VERSION 1

CHANNEL #1 FORWARD ID 442BF5

4.7 SECONDS: STAND-ALONE MODE

FIRMWARE VERSIONS:

KERNEL: V1.7 -- Wed Mar 24 13:09:23 2010

APPLICATION: V22.006 -- Wed Apr 07 10:01:30 2010

CHANNEL CARD #1: 4.9.G.0 -- 1.0.2.0 -- 2.1.0.0 -- 4.2.3.0

CHANNEL CARD #2: 31.5.0.1 --

DATA I/O CARD: Version 1.87.0.0 built on Mar 16 2010 12:15:16

VOICE PROCESSOR: Version 1.2.3.DEV built on Mar 31 2010 at 23:27:20

VP BOOT LOADER: Version 1.2.1 built on Wednesday October 21 2009 at 14:04:24

SPOTBEAM TABLE: PROVIDED BY SATELLITE

CHANNEL CARD STATISTICS

CARD #1 BGAN 6X (SERIAL 6203):

3036.1 hrs powered 266.6 hrs in call since 10:40:26 Feb 12, 2009

CARD #2 CLASSIC AERO (SERIAL 36500):

2635.1 hrs powered 1507.3 hrs in call since 10:17:37 Feb 27, 2001

BGAN INTERFACE IMEI SVN IMSI

CARD #1 12345678912345 01 987654321123456

CHECKING FLASHPROM CONFIGURATION .............

HARDWARE:

PART NUMBER REVISION

EMS: 1252-A-3800-01 A01

23-15-30

4-69

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

SOFTWARE:

PART NUMBER REVISION

EMS: LI-1252-38015 XXX

BOOT CRC: 5249CAFF

APP. CRC: A3A3D6B7

CC #1 CRC: CBA1

CC #2 CRC: 9F4E

SECURE ORT: sss123 ** MODIFIED **

USER ORT: uuu456 ** MODIFIED **

Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus.

Other passwords provide different levels of authorization.

time 21.5 seconds: powering on channel card 2 time 23.1 seconds: powering on channel card 1

Figure 4-20 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Power-Up Display Example

(6) System On-Air Checks

Conduct system on-air checks to confirm voice and data call capabilities through the satellite and ground station network. Additional testing confirms that proper signal level parameters are obtained through the antenna subsystem.

(a) Preparation

Before attempting on-air testing procedures:

1. Complete and confirm all service provider registration and activation.

2. Complete and document all pre power-up and power-up checks.

3. Position the aircraft outside, away from all obstructions in the line-of-sight to the satellite.

4. Apply the aircraft power source.

5. Power on and wait for the IRS to align.

6. Connect a computer (with a terminal emulation program) to the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal maintenance port.

NOTE: Several system parameters, such as IRS data, RF signal quality, and logon messaging, appear on the maintenance port display.

Capture and save this maintenance port information to a file for later review or to serve as a historical test record.

(b) On-Air Power up and Logon Procedure

For this test procedure, use the Level 2 password to access the HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal MPU. For information on how to connect to, access, and use the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.

To perform an on-air power up and logon:

1. With the computer connected, powered up, and ready to accept maintenance port data, power up the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

2. Once the power up messages appear, type the Level 2 password maint .

23-15-30

4-70

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

3. To access the reports menu, press EQUAL SIGN, and then activate reports

21 (call codes) and 23 (standard output).

Remember to save these selected items by pressing S (save to EEPROM).

4. To reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, in Menu 2, press Z , and then immediately type the password maint when the reset messages appear.

The data from the previously selected reports 21 and 23 appears. This data refreshes on-screen every second. You can capture this information in a log file for later review or pause the display by pressing SCROLL LOCK or highlighting part of the viewed data.

5. Compare the output data to the sample shown in Figure 4-21.

You can review and document several parameters for operational verification

purposes. Refer to "Installation Checklist" on page E-1 for a detailed list of

parameters.

6. Verify that the following system information, as shown on the System

Initialization Display during the test, is accurate for the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal under test.

• FWD ID

• Installation mode

• Number of channel cards

• All channel cards trigger OR registration

Once the system has logged on, place a test voice and/or data call. Refer to

"System Operation" on page 2-1 for detailed call procedures. Verification of all

aircraft communication functions is recommended. Record the test call result on

"Installation Checklist" on page E-1.

NOTE: For the purposes of providing a sample display, an ISDN voice call is documented.

(d) On-Air Voice/Data Call Verification Procedure

To place an on-air voice or data call:

1. Make sure that the maintenance port reports 21 and 23 are activated.

2. Place a test call.

3. Observe the maintenance port messages, and verify that they are similar to

the sample provided in Figure 4-21.

23-15-30

4-71

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

17:12:39 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)

CHAN #1: C/No=51.4 dB Hz sig=-31.4 dB 41.5 C no call beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.5 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB 41.5 C no call beam=5

CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-26.1 dB 40.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 40.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

17:12:40 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 41.5 C 52 dB Hz

17:12:40 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)

CHAN #1: C/No=51.5 dB Hz sig=-32.2 dB 41.5 C speech beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-32.9 dB 41.5 C no call beam=5

CHAN #3: C/No=49.3 dB Hz sig=-26.2 dB 40.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 40.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

17:12:42 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 41.5 C 52 dB Hz

17:12:42 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)

CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig=-1000 dB 41.5 C speech beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-33.7 dB 41.5 C no call beam=5

CHAN #3: C/No=49.3 dB Hz sig=-26.2 dB 40.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 40.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

17:12:44 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)

CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig=-19.6 dB 41.5 C speech beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-32.7 dB 41.5 C no call beam=5

CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-25.8 dB 40.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 40.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

17:12:49 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)

CHAN #1: C/No=62.2 dB Hz sig=-19.9 dB 41.5 C speech beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB 41.5 C no call beam=5

CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-25.9 dB 40.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 40.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

17:12:51 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)

CHAN #1: C/No=61.8 dB Hz sig=-19.8 dB 41.5 C speech beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.7 dB Hz sig=-32.9 dB 41.5 C no call beam=5

CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-25.9 dB 40.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 40.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

17:12:52 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 41.5 C 0 dB Hz

17:12:52 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (sbd)

CHAN #1: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig=-1000 dB 41.5 C no call beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB 41.5 C no call beam=5

CHAN #3: C/No=48.8 dB Hz sig=-26.1 dB 40.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 40.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

Figure 4-21 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal Call Display Example

(7) Antenna Tracking Checks

As a final ground-based system check, verify the antenna tracking. This confirms proper signal reception and transmission for all aircraft headings.

23-15-30

4-72

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(a) Preparation

• Perform all previous tests and document the results before proceeding.

• As directed in previous tests, connect a computer to the maintenance port and use the Level 2 password to access the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU.

• Power up all avionics and align the IRS.

• Taxi or tow the aircraft to an unobstructed, line-of-sight location where a complete 360° rotation is possible.

(b) Antenna Tracking Verification Procedure

To verify antenna tracking:

NOTE: Report 8 (starboard antenna status word) is only required where conformal antennas are installed.

1. From the reports menu, toggle on reports 8 , 20 , and 23 .

2. Position the aircraft at a baseline, start-of-test heading (0 degrees true heading is recommended).

3. Confirm that the baseline heading, as reported by the aircraft IRS, is similar to that reported from the "HD" entry in report 23.

4. Record the following data on the "Installation Checklist" on page E-1:

• Antenna selected—port or starboard (conformal only)

• Antenna gain and azimuth angle

• Heading

• Channel card C/No and signal levels

5. Rotate the aircraft through a full 360° circle while stopping to record data at the following heading intervals:

• For conformal or phased arrays: every 15°

• For mechanically steered antenna: every 30°

(8) Optional System Checks

The following procedures are recommended but not essential. However, they serve to confirm successful completion of all previous tests.

(a) Preparation

Activate reports 21 and 23 for the following checks.

(b) Optional Voice/Data Calls Procedure

NOTE: As in previous tests, open a log file to capture all maintenance port activity during aircraft taxiing, flight, and landing segments.

• Voice/data calls—ground segment:

Place any combination of voice and/or data calls while the aircraft is taxied in a full circle and/or a figure 8 pattern. Note any voice or data anomalies.

23-15-30

4-73

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Voice/data calls—in flight:

Place any combination of voice and/or data calls during flight. The flight pattern may include "standard rate of turn," figure 8, or circles. Note any voice or data anomalies.

2. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation

This section provides troubleshooting procedures for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals experiencing faults during the commissioning process or previously operational terminals now considered as not working.

Troubleshooting procedures require data obtained using the MPU of the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminals. For specific instructions on how to access and use the maintenance port and MPU,

refer to "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.

A. Troubleshooting Practices

Troubleshooting practices for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal fall into two categories: non-specific and specific complaints.

(1) Non-specific Complaints

When troubleshooting terminals with non-specific complaints, complete all system

verification and functional tests starting on page 4–60. Document whether the

terminal passes or fails each test.

If the terminal passes all tests and no fault is discovered, all associated equipment and aircraft wiring should be tested.

If the terminal fails a specific test, isolate the actual fault or faults by performing the troubleshooting procedures provided in this section.

(2) Specific Complaints

When troubleshooting terminals with specific complaints, you can proceed directly to the applicable troubleshooting and fault isolation procedure provided in this section.

B. Equipment Required

The equipment required for troubleshooting and fault isolation is the same as the

equipment required for test purposes, as listed in "Test and Fault Isolation Equipment

Requirements" on page 4-35.

C. Troubleshooting Aids

This section presents examples of maintenance screens and troubleshooting tables to assist in troubleshooting and fault isolation activities. The exact screen display may vary depending on the version of the terminal's operational software and installation configuration mode.

NOTE: The screens used in the figures presented in this section may have been edited for clarity and illustrative purposes.

23-15-30

4-74

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays

Figure 4-22 to Figure 4-31 provide example maintenance screens for reference and

illustration purposes. time 8.6 seconds: powering on channel card #2 card is already on

SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND time 22.1 seconds CHAN #2 CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING ORR IN AORE!!

SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND time 22.5 seconds CHAN #1 CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING ORR IN AORE!!

10:45:14 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

32.0 C 54 dB Hz

10:45:15 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

32.0 C 55 dB Hz

10:45:18 #2 ABC456 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 32.0 C 54 dB Hz

10:45:19 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8306 ACSE successful ORR 32.0 C 54 dB Hz

Figure 4-22 Successful OR Registration (report 21 activated)

10:45:14 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

32.0 C 54 dB Hz

10:45:15 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration

32.0 C 55 dB Hz

10:45:18 #2 ABC456 E5 stop 8301 ACSE failed retry ORR 32.0 C 54 dB Hz

10:45:19 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 32.0 C 54 dB Hz

Figure 4-23 Failed OR Registration

15:14:08 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (p/t)

CHAN #1: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.2 dB 42.5 C no call beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.5 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB 42.5 C no call beam=4

CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-24.2 dB 41.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 41.5 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

Figure 4-24 No Call (report 23)

15:15:04 #1 442BF5 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 42.5 C 52 dB Hz

15:15:03 dop 0 ppb az 112.2 deg el 12.2 deg AORE ant gain 12.0 (p/t)

CHAN #1: C/No=51.8 dB Hz sig=-32.6 dB 42.5 C speech beam=4

CHAN #2: C/No=51.6 dB Hz sig=-33.4 dB 42.5 C no call beam=4

CHAN #3: C/No=48.9 dB Hz sig=-24.5 dB 41.0 C log on beam=4

CHAN #4: C/No= 0.0 dB Hz sig= -0.0 dB 41.0 C no call beam=4

45D0'0.0"N 75D0'0.2"W PT 0.0D RL 0.0D HD 0.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 0 ft

Figure 4-25 In Call—Swift 64 Voice Call on Channel 1 (reports 21 and 23)

23-15-30

4-75

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

12:43:55 dop**** az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t)

CARD #1: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-33.9 dB 27 C no call beam=4

CARD #2: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-34.2 dB 27 C no call beam=4

************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* *******

CARD #1: C/No=52.4.0 dB/Hz sig=-33.6 dB 27 C in call beam=4

CARD #2: C/No=52.4 dB/Hz sig=-34.5 dB 27 C no call beam=4

************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* *******

Figure 4-26 No IRS Data (report 23 activated)

FORWARD ID TABLE -- VERSION 1

**** strapping identifies forward id ffffff -- not in table ****

**** eeprom forward id 000000 not in table *****

7.6 SECONDS: EEPROM FORCES STAND-ALONE MODE time 18.0 seconds: powering on channel card #1 time 18.0 seconds: powering on channel card #2

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** WARNINGS ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** *

CHANNEL CARD FORWARD ID IS ZERO

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

Figure 4-27 FWD ID Not Strapped (no reports activated)

23-15-30

4-76

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x

L list EEPROM S list event log

C clear event log M misc. EEPROM parameter

F list call log G clear call log

O list ORT P ocean region parameter

I set all LES id's

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

G clear call log

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

HPA ERROR CODE 1800 hit '0' for complete log '1' for 'special' events '-' for specific entry

FAULT (ENTRY #1428): address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup powerup #204 389 hours operation Jan 01 14:19:39 2006

ERROR CODE 40

HPA FAULT -- 0x1800

HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA

HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA

Continuous Power Requests From LES, Report 21 activated:

10:51:26 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30

C 54 dB/Hz

10:51:26 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29

C 54 dB/Hz

10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C

10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C

10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29

C 0 dB/Hz

10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30

C 0 dB/Hz

10:51:29 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29

C 54 dB/Hz

10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30

C 54 dB/Hz

10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C

Figure 4-28 No Strap on SDI Lines, Open (no reports activated)

23-15-30

4-77

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Log-on password entered: "Maint"

MENU 1 FIRMWARE Vx.x

X override forward id L test LEDs

Y explain error status U list event log (hex)

F print equipment stats M clear equipment stats

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

HPA UNCONTROLLED

Y command entered:

HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR

HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA

HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)

HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA

Event log messages:

MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x

L list EEPROM S list event log

C clear event log M misc. EEPROM parameter

F list call log G clear call log

O list ORT P ocean region parameter

I set all LES id's

<CTRL> N next menu <CTRL> O previous menu = select reports

FAULT (ENTRY #1422): address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup

powerup #203 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:15:07 2003

ERROR CODE 40

HPA FAULT -- 0x1c80

HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR

HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA

HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA)

HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA

Figure 4-29 Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND)

11:47:43 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 30 C 50 dB/Hz

11:47:46 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 28 C 50 dB/Hz

11:47:55 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 29 C 47 dB/Hz

11:47:57 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz calling 0116135919064#

11:48:10 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 11d2 call failed, insufficient digits in service address

28 C 0 calling 0116135919064#

Figure 4-30 Incorrect Dialing Format (report 52 enabled)

23-15-30

4-78

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active HGA LNA on port maintenance 0x00600003 port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port status: 0x608033 SDI: ACU SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 12

Figure 4-31 Top/Port Antenna Status (reports 18, 19, and 20 activated)

(2) Troubleshooting Table

Table 4-24 provides troubleshooting procedures for basic HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

faults. Before starting a troubleshooting procedure, access the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal MPU using the maint password. For detailed connection and user

instructions, see "Connection Requirements" on page 4-37.

23-15-30

4-79

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Fault

Red LED remains on after power-up

HPA error status

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation

Description

Maintenance

Report

• HPA uncontrolled

• HPA fault

• reporting invalid SSM

• HPA not reporting status word

143

• HPA not reporting maintenance word 350

• HPA maintenance word reporting ARINC error

• HPA maintenance word not reporting HGA antenna

• HPA maintenance word reporting VSWR error

• HPA maintenance word reporting RAM error

• HPA reporting ROM error

• HPA maintenance word reporting power supply error

• HPA maintenance word reporting temperature error

View power-up display of the

MPU

To obtain an explanation of the HPA error status, in Menu

1, press Y

Check

• Verify that the multicontrol, loopback is wired (out to in).

• Check that the external power source is properly connected and meets installation requirements.

• Check that the transmit path from

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal output

(MPC1) to the antenna subsystem

(e.g., coaxial cables, splitters, and relays).

• Check that the installation location meets the RTCA/DO-160E environmental specifications.

• Check for proper fan-tray operation and air-cooling.

• Verify the fan-tray plug distribution is as per the installation requirements.

23-15-30

4-80

3 JUN 10

Fault

Call failure

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)

Description

Maintenance

Report

Check

IRS information not available

System does not log on to the global beam

System does not log on to the correct OR

Activate maintenance reports 21 and

• Check that the IRS systems are powered on and aligned.

• Check that connections to the IRS systems are secured.

• Check the polarity of IRS input lines.

• If no IRS data is available, use

Menu 10 to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and try the call again.

• Check that the IRS data is received and valid.

• Make sure that a valid FWD ID is read.

• Verify that the antenna is pointing in the correct direction.

• Make sure that LES/GES access codes are configured correctly.

• Verify all coaxial connections.

• Check that the IRS data is received and valid.

• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.

Terminal is not transmitting Activate maintenance reports 21 and

• Check for a defective or loose RF cable.

• Verify that the Rx RF level is acceptable.

• Check RF power level displayed in maintenance port menu report

21; the EIRP should be requested at 14.00 dBW, but when in call, power level should increase to

22.5 dBW and then level off to approximately 16 dBW.

• Make sure that the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray.

23-15-30

4-81

3 JUN 10

Fault

Call failure

(cont’d)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)

Description

Maintenance

Report

Check

ICAO is invalid or strapped incorrectly

Terminal is strapped to an incorrect system mode of installation

Activate maintenance report 21

To check ICAO, in Menu 4, press

• The account registration process has not been completed. Check your account status with your service provider to make sure that the account registration has been processed into the LES/GES databases and your account is valid.

• If the message, Channel card stuck in boot state appears in the event log, check that the assigned ICAO is strapped correctly.

In Menu 3, press

L (List

EEPROM)

• Verify the system mode strapping is correct.

• Reset the system and observe the initialization display; it shows that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is powering up and displays the terminal’s self-test results. The

Initialization display lists the installation mode configuration for the terminal.

• If the mode displayed is not strapped or is incorrectly strapped, a temporary setting may be used. In Menu 3, press M

(misc. EEPROM parameters), then type 16 (channel card category) and configure the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to the correct mode. Reset the terminal and try the call again.

SBB IMSI not registered

Dialing sequence was incomplete or incorrect

Activate reports

21 and 52

• Call service provider

• Verify the number you are calling and try the number again.

• Make sure that you end the dialing sequence by pressing POUND

KEY. Pressing POUND KEY at the end of the dialing string signals the system to send the call.

23-15-30

4-82

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Fault

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)

Description

Maintenance

Report

Check

Logon request fails

Terminal is not transmitting

Terminal is not receiving

Activate maintenance reports 21 and

• Check for defective or loose cables.

• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.

• Check for HPA fault.

• Make sure that the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray.

• Make sure that your account is current and active.

• Check for defective or loose cables.

• Make sure that the antenna subsystem DLNA is powered.

• Check for antenna line-of-sight interference.

• Verify that the ICAO is valid, activated, and strapped correctly.

• Make sure that your account is current and active.

• Make sure that the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray.

Incoming call failure

Incoming call shows as a successful connection in report 23, but call does not ring through to the external device (telephone, computer, fax).

Activate reports

21 and 23

• Check the connection between the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and the external device.

• Check configuration of external devices is correct. MSN must be configured correctly for each device connected to the system.

• If MSNs are not programmed in the user devices, incoming calls will ring all devices.

NOTE: Zero is an invalid entry.

23-15-30

4-83

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Fault

Logon successful, but fails to complete call

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)

12C4)

Description

Authorization error (fault code

Maintenance

Report

Activate reports

21 and 23

Check

• Contact your service provider to verify that the ICAO, FWD ID, and

IMSI are activated.

• Check that the ICAO is strapped correctly.

• Check that IRS data is available and correct.

• Check that the Veh Rel Az/EL to

Satellite is correct.

• Check that all coaxial cable connections are secure.

• Check that the Rx C/No value is greater than 50 dB/Hz.

• Check that the antenna is functioning.

• Check that the primary and secondary LES/GES access codes are valid.

• Contact your service provider and verify that they can "see" your Tx signal. To contact the LES/GES operator, dial 33, POUND KEY.

• Contact service provider and request that they place an incoming call to the terminal.

• Check the reported HPA back-off in report 21. The S64 signal should initialize at 14 dBW and increase after handshake to approximately 22.5 dBW, then slowly decrease (typically to between 16.5 dBW and 21.5 dBW with a lower limit of 14.5 dBW).

23-15-30

4-84

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Fault

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)

Description

Maintenance

Report

Activate report

21 or 23

HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal is operating outside the normal environmental specifications

Channel card temperature fault

Check

• Check channel card temperature; temperatures over 50° C may cause the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal to shut down.

• Check that the fan tray is operational.

• Verify that the tray plug distribution is the same as presented in the installation requirements.

Calls do not complete and connection is not established

Channel Congestion (fault code

2024) Note: applies to Swift 64 only.

Activate reports

21 and 23

• Wait five minutes and try the call again.

• Contact the LES/GES to verify congestion. To contact the

LES/GES operator, dial 33,

POUND KEY.

No dial tone heard in handset

No call request sent Activate report

Activate report

• Verify that the call dial string is correct; pressing POUND KEY at the end of the dialing string signals the system to send the call.

• Check that the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal is transmitting by ensuring the LED power indicator flashes on and off (1 Hz) during a call request.

• Check that the ISDN, Ethernet, or

POTS cable is connected correctly and securely.

• Confirm that ISDN lines are wired correctly.

• Verify that handset connection is secure.

• Wait a few minutes for the system to warm up, then log on and try your call again.

• Check that IRS data is available.

• Verify that the terminal has completed beam registration.

23-15-30

4-85

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Fault

Call drops after successful connection

Table 4-24 Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation (Continued)

Description

Maintenance

Report

Check

If the RF signal fades significantly

(during a call), the connection may drop.

NOTE: A sudden, severe aircraft banking angle may obstruct the signal long enough (>15 sec.) to drop a call.

Activate reports

21 and 23

• Check signal strength.

For Swift 64, C/No greater than or equal to 53.2 dB.

• Make sure that there is a clear, unobstructed, line of sight to the satellite.

• Select an alternate satellite or beam and try your call again.

NOTE: This troubleshooting procedure works if you are located where more than one beam overlaps or satellite is in view.

D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures

This section provides basic information required for technical personnel to isolate faults in HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals. Where needed, refer to other sections of this manual

(which contain important information to aid in understanding the function of the terminal) for additional information.

Fault isolation procedures are usually conducted on equipment that falls within one of the following categories:

• Terminals that have failed to pass operational and installation verification procedures

• Terminals that have failed during service

• Terminals repaired and returned to service

CAUTION: BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES,

REFER TO THE "SAFETY ADVISORIES" ON PAGE INTRO-6.

(1) General

When performing fault isolation and diagnostic procedures, record and document all test results, including LED functions and maintenance port data outputs (reports 21 and 23).

Enable reports 18, 19, and 20 (port), or items 6, 7, and 8 (starboard) to record antenna, ACU, and DLNA related faults. Enable other reports as required.

(2) Saving a Diagnostic Reports File

Maintenance reports are helpful in troubleshooting the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

Capturing maintenance port information from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and forwarding the file to Honeywell technical support staff will assist in troubleshooting suspected HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal problems.

23-15-30

4-86

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To save a diagnostics reports file:

1. Open a log file on the maintenance port, terminal program. (If you are using

HyperTerminal, use the "Transfer, capture text" function.)

2. Power the system on or if applicable reset the system.

3. Enter maintenance mode on the maintenance port using maint as the password.

4. To activate reports 21 and 23 and toggle off all other reports, press EQUAL SIGN.

5. To save these reports as default, press S . This enables the user to view these reports on subsequent HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal power-ups or Reset entries.

6. Reset the system by cycling the power to the terminal; pressing the reset button on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal front panel; or, in Menu 2, pressing Z .

NOTE: The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be logged on to the Aero H+ service.

7. Log on to the maintenance port using the password: maint

The system restarts and ocean registration takes place (approximately two minutes).

8. To display Menu 2, press CTRL+N.

9. To display the software versions of the system, press V .

10. Make a call from the system or execute the procedure or sequence that causes the call failure. Make a note of the call progress. For example: Did you get a dial tone? Was the call successful?

11. If applicable, attempt calls from the remaining three channels.

12. To display the current reports profile of the system (as noted in step 4), press

EQUAL SIGN.

13. To save an alternate reports configuration, activate the required items, and then, to save to EEPROM, press S in the reports menu.

14. To display the ORT List, press CTRL+N until Menu 3 appears, and then press

O. (The ORT list displays one terminal screen of information at a time. To display the next screen, press O.)

15. To list the complete event log, in Menu 3:

• press S (list event log)

• press 0 (list complete log)

• press PERIOD (list all remaining entries)

16. To list the complete call log, in Menu 3:

• press F (list call log)

• press F again (list complete log)

• press PERIOD (list all remaining entries)

• for extended information, press X

17. Close the log file on the terminal program.

23-15-30

4-87

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

18. The log file is in text format (.txt file). Open the file and add notes to the beginning of the file indicating:

• System serial number (from the label on the front of the terminal)

• Aircraft ID and customer name

• Any notes about the problems encountered

• Contact name, telephone number, and e-mail address

• Any system anomalies or unique operating environments that may in any way affect the system’s function (e.g., physical location of aircraft or terminal,

LES being used, list of connected devices)

19. Save the file with the date of the report in the file name.

20. E-mail the log file to Honeywell technical support.

3. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures

There are no adjustment/alignment procedures required for HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals.

4. Modification History

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal currently has no history of modifications.

23-15-30

4-88

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

This section provides maintenance and repair information for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, including the following sections:

•

Maintenance

•

Repair

•

Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

1. Maintenance

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal does not require routine maintenance.

2. Repair

All repair procedures must be completed by Honeywell-approved repair facilities.

A. Repair Tools and Supplies

No special supplies are required to repair this equipment.

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals that require service must be returned to Honeywell or to an

Honeywell-approved service center. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35 for

terminal testing requirements and procedures.

B. Repair Procedures

This equipment does not require any special repair procedures.

C. Battery Replacement

The internal battery of the HSD-440 terminal cannot be replaced in the field. The unit must be returned to factory to have the internal battery replaced.

D. Removal Procedures

If an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be removed from service for repair, remove power, disconnect all equipment from the terminal and then remove it from the ARINC tray.Remove the SCM from the terminal before returning the terminal for repair. You can insert the SCM into the repaired terminal before installing it in the aircraft.

E. Repair Facility Approvals

EMS Aviation, located at 400 Maple Grove Road in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, is a

Transport Canada Approved Maintenance Organization (AMO). In accordance with the

Technical Arrangement on Maintenance between Canada and the European aviation authority JAA, and due to the Bilateral Agreement between Canada and the United States aviation authority FAA, EMS Aviation conforms to the maintenance requirements of JAR

145 and FAR 145 respectively.

23-15-30

5-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Return for Repair Information

Contact Honeywell International about return for repair instructions.

3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

This section presents the instructions for continued airworthiness, as per FAR 25.1529, of the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

Installation of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal on an aircraft by supplemental type certificate

(STC) or Form 337 obligates the aircraft operator to include the maintenance information supplied by this manual in the operator's Aircraft Maintenance manual and the operator's Aircraft

Scheduled Maintenance Program.

The following paragraphs describe all maintenance requirements and instructions for continued airworthiness of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

• Add the LRU part numbers and other necessary part numbers contained in this manual to the aircraft operator's appropriate, aircraft illustrated parts catalog (IPC).

• Add all wiring diagram information contained in this manual to the aircraft operator's appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals.

• HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals are considered on-condition units. No additional or routine maintenance is required.

• If an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not operating, remove the terminal, secure cables and wiring, collar applicable switches and circuit breakers, and placard them as inoperative.

Before flight, revise the equipment list and weight and balance data as applicable and record the removal of the terminal in the log book. Refer to section 91.213 of the FAR or the aircraft's minimum equipment list (MEL).

• HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminals can not be repaired in the field. All terminals must be returned to the Honeywell factory or authorized repair centers for repair.

• Repaired terminals must be re-installed on the aircraft in accordance with the instructions provided in this manual. The operation of all repaired terminals must be verified using the operational verification tests and procedures provided in this manual before being approved for return to service. All special tools required to test the terminal for approval for return to

service are listed and described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-35. Approval for

return to service must be entered in the logbook as required by section 43.9 of the FAR.

• The following scheduled maintenance tasks must be added to the aircraft operator's appropriate aircraft maintenance program:

• Recommended periodic scheduled servicing tasks: None required.

• Recommended periodic inspections: None required.

• Recommended periodic scheduled preventative maintenance tests (tests to determine system condition and/or latent failures): None required.

23-15-30

5-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

CONFIGURING THE OWNERS REQUIREMENTS TABLE

(ORT)

There are two methods of configuring ORT parameters:

•

Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU

•

Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application

When your computer is connected to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through the serial maintenance connection, you can set ORT parameters one at a time.

Using the EMS ORT Application, you can edit various ORT parameters in one session, save and export an ORT file, and then load the file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

1. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU

For information on creating ORTs using the MPU , see "Creating ORTs with the Maintenance Port

Utility (MPU)" on page 2-4.

This section lists the parameters you can configure in both the secure partition and the user partition of the ORT. See the individual procedure for more information.

You can use the MPU to configure the secure parameters described in Table 6-1:

Category

ORT Part Number

Cockpit Communications

4-wire

POTS

CEPT-E1

Ethernet

Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters

High Speed Data Services

Section

Configuring the ORT Part Number (secure)

Configuring the Call Signaling Mode

Configuring Outgoing Call Signaling

Configuring Ground Public Routing

Configuring 4-wire Wiring

Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call Routing

Configuring 4-wire Parameters

Configuring POTS Parameters

Configuring CEPT-E1 Interface

Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface Type

Configuring the Default PPPoE Service

Configuring SCPC High Speed Service

Configuring MPDS High Speed Service

Configuring SBB High Speed Service

Configuring Ethernet Wiring

Configuring Ethernet Duplex Mode

Configuring the Ethernet Port Address

Configuring the Ethernet Mask

23-15-30

6-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters (Continued)

Category Section

Networking Parameters for Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2

Configuring the Host Name

Configuring the Access Concentrator Name

Configuring the SNMP Server

Configuring the SNMP Community String

Configuring the TFTP Server

Avionics

Configuring the DHCP Client

Configuring the DHCP Server

Configuring Telnet Access

Configuring the Managed Range

Configuring the Number of Managed Addresses

Configuring the Access Point Name

Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS)

Configuring the Secondary IRS

Satellite Service

Antenna

Configuring the Secondary IRS Input Speed

Configuring GNSS Equipment

Configuring the ICAO Code Source

Configuring the Forward ID

Configuring Satellite Information

Configuring GES Service Provider Information

Configuring the Frequency Table

Configuring LES Service Provider Information

Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing Mode

Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card One

Configuring the Service Type Priority

Configuring the Antenna Type

Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation Angle

Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch Angle

Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll Angle

Configuring the HPA to Antenna Loss

Configuring the Diplexer

23-15-30

6-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

MCDU

CMU

Table 6-1 Configuring Secure ORT Parameters (Continued)

Category

Terminal Operation

Passive Intermodulation (PIM)

Section

Configuring MCDU Wiring

Configuring the MCDU Input Speed

Configuring the MCDU Output Speed

Configuring the MCDU Controller Type

Configuring the MCDU Type

Configuring the MCDU Font Colour

Configuring Manual Dialing

Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection

Configuring the Address Book Categories

Configuring CMU Wiring

Configuring the CMU Input Speed

Configuring the CMU Output Speed

Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave Word

Configuring Hardcoded SAL

Configuring Air/Ground Status Restrictions

Configuring Transmit on Ground

Configuring Self-test in Air

Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in Air

Configuring MCDU PAST

Configuring Field Loadable Software

Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy

Configuring Logon Interrogation

Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam

Masking Position in Logs

Configuring HSD SAL

Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle

Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle

Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1

Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2

Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1

Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2

Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio

Configuring PIMBIT Failure Threshold

Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold

You can use the MPU to configure the user parameters described in Table 6-2:

23-15-30

6-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Category

User Parameters

Table 6-2 User ORT Parameters

User ORT Parameter

Configuring the ORT Part Number (user)

Configuring the Service Type Priority

Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy

Configuring Logon Interrogation

Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam

Masking Position in Logs

A. Connecting to the MPU

You can configure ORT parameters manually or using the EMS ORT Application through the HSD-440 terminal MPU.

To connect to the MPU:

1. Connect your computer to the maintenance port of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal with a maintenance cable.

2. Start a terminal emulator session with the following parameters:

• Baud rate—19200

• No. of bits—8

• Parity—None

• Stop bits—1

• Flow control—None

3. When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal boots, type the password maint .

NOTE: The password does not appear on the screen.

NOTE: You can configure secure and user ORT parameters using maintenance-level access. The user-level access password, user , allows you to see all the ORT parameters but you can only configure the user-level parameters.

Menu 1 of the MPU appears. You can navigate the menus to configure ORT parameters.

4. To navigate to Menu 3 , press CTRL + N.

5. In Menu 3, type the number next to set CP ORT parameter , and then press ENTER.

A list of ORT parameters appears.

B. Configuring the ORT Part Number

You can configure a part number for the secure and user ORT. The HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal displays the part number when it boots up.

23-15-30

6-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

When you configure the parameter for the part number, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal calculates a CRC value for the overall ORT. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the

CRC value to indicate when the ORT has changed.

To configure the secure ORT part number or the user ORT part number:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECURE ORT P/N parameter, or the USER ORT P/N parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the SECURE ORT P/N or the USER ORT P/N prompt, type in the part number, and then press ENTER.

You can type up to 20 characters. The default is blank.

C. Configuring Cockpit Communication Parameters

(1) Configuring the Call Signaling Mode

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can announce an incoming call in the aircraft cabin with a chime and light of ARINC 741—the default setting, or with the CD1/CD2 discretes. The call signaling parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the call signaling mode:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT CALL

SIGNALING MODE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To use chime and light signaling, type 0 , or to use CD1/CD2 discrete signaling, type 1 , and then press ENTER.

The default is CHIME/LIGHT.

(2) Configuring Outgoing Call Signaling

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can signal an outgoing call with a chime and a flashing light. The outgoing call signaling parameter enables and disables these signals. This parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure outgoing call signaling:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT OUTGOING

CALL SIGNALING parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To announce outgoing air to ground calls with a chime and light, type 1 , or to disable the chime and light, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(3) Configuring Ground Public Routing

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can route public calls from the ground to the cockpit, to the CEPT-E1 interface, or not route the call (disallowed). The ground public routing preference parameter is in the secure ORT.

23-15-30

6-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure ground public routing preferences:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GROUND PUBLIC

ROUTING PREFERENCE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To disallow all incoming public calls, type 1 , or to route public calls to the cockpit, type 2 , or to route public calls to the CEPT-E1, type 3 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISALLOWED.

D. Configuring 4-wire Parameters

(1) Configuring 4-wire Wiring

The 4-wire #2 wired ORT parameter defines whether the second 4-wire equipment is installed. The 4-wire #2 wired parameter is in the secure ORT.

NOTE: If the '4-WIRE #2 WIRED' ORT parameter is set to NO then the GROUND TO

COCKPIT ROUTING PREF parameter is automatically set to 4-WIRE #1.

To configure 4-wire #2 wiring:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-Wire #2 Wired parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To set the preference to NO, type 0 , or to set the preference to YES, type 1 , and then press ENTER.

The default is NO.

(2) Configuring Ground-to-Cockpit Call Routing

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can route calls from the ground to the cockpit through either of the two supported 4-wire phones. The call routing parameter is in the secure

ORT.

To configure ground-to-cockpit call routing:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GROUND TO

COCKPIT CALL ROUTING PREF parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To route the calls to 4-WIRE #1, type 1 , or to route the calls to 4-WIRE #2 (if wired) type 2 , and then press ENTER.

The default is 4-WIRE #1.

(3) Configuring 4-wire Parameters

You can configure the noise, speaker, microphone, and sidetone level settings of the

4-wire phones. These 4-wire parameters are in the user ORT.

NOTE: To configure the 4-wire #2 parameters, repeat the following four procedures.

23-15-30

6-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure the 4-wire noise level:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 NOISE

LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, define the default setting for the 4-wire #1 comfort noise insertion level by typing one of the following values: 0, -40, -50, or -60, and then press

ENTER.

The default level is -50.

To configure the 4-wire speaker level:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 SPEAKER

LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, define the 4-wire #1 speaker volume, by typing a value between

0 and 100, and then press ENTER.

The default level is 50, which equals a 2.5 mW output.

To configure the 4-wire microphone level:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 MIC LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type in a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.

The default level is 70.

To configure the 4-wire sidetone level:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the 4-WIRE #1 SIDETONE

LEVEL parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, define the default setting for the 4-wire #1 sidetone level by typing a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.

The default level is 50.

E. Configuring POTS Parameters

(1) Configuring POTS

You can enable and disable POTS with the POTS service parameter. The POTS service parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure POTS:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the POTS SERVICE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable POTS, type 1 , or to disable POTS, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is ENABLED.

Configuring CEPT-E1 Parameters

You can enable the CEPT-E1 interface with the MPU.

23-15-30

6-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(1) Configuring CEPT-E1 Interface

The CEPT-E1 wiring parameter indicates whether the CEPT-E1 interface is wired.

The CEPT-E1 wiring parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure CEPT-E1 wiring:

1. In the list of ORT interface parameters, type the number next to the CEPT E1

WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To indicate the CEPT-E1 interface is wired, type 1 , or to indicate the CEPT-E1 interface is not wired, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is YES.

(2) Configuring the CEPT-E1 Interface Type

The CEPT-E1 interface can connect to a variety of equipment. The available options are:

• Not installed

• ARINC 746

• ITU

The CEPT-E1 interface type parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the CEPT-E1 interface type:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CEPT E1 INTERFACE

TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To indicate that the CEPT-E1 interface type is not installed, type 0 , or to indicate the CEPT-E1 interface type is ARINC 746, type 1 , or to indicate the CEPT-E1 interface type is ITU, type 2, and then press ENTER.

The default is ARINC 746.

G. Configuring High Speed Data Services

(1) Configuring the Default PPPoE Service

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can use a default PPPoE service name if the client does not provide the service name. The default PPPoE service parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the default PPPoE service:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the DEFAULT PPPOE

SERVICE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a default service name, up to 60-characters in length, and then press

ENTER.

The default PPPoE service name is PacketData.

(2) Configuring SCPC High Speed Service

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to Swift 64 SCPC service through

Ethernet. The parameter to allow SCPC sessions is in the secure ORT.

23-15-30

6-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure SCPC high speed service:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW SCPC

SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable SCPC services, type 1 , or to disable SCPC services, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is YES.

(3) Configuring MPDS High Speed Service

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to Swift 64 MPDS service through

Ethernet. The parameter to allow MPDS sessions is in the secure ORT.

To configure MPDS high speed service:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW MPDS

SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable MPDS high speed service, type 1 , or to disable MPDS high speed service, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is YES.

(4) Configuring SBB High Speed Service

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can provide access to SBB service through Ethernet.

The parameter to allow SBB sessions is in the secure ORT.

To configure SBB high speed service:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW BGAN

SESSIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable SBB high speed service, type 1 , or to disable SBB high speed service, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is YES.

H. Configuring Ethernet Parameters

(1) Configuring Ethernet Wiring

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the parameters for Ethernet #1 and #2 wiring in conjunction with the Ethernet link status to determine whether to raise and transmit

Ethernet faults to the CMU. If the Ethernet wiring parameters are set to NO, the parameters for the Ethernet address and Ethernet mask have no effect.

The Ethernet wiring parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure Ethernet wiring:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET #1 WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To specify that a device is wired to the Ethernet #1 port, type 1 , or to specify that no device is wired to the Ethernet #1 port, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is YES, wired.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to configure the ETHERNET #2 WIRED parameter.

23-15-30

6-9

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(2) Configuring Ethernet Duplex Mode

You can define the duplex mode for the Ethernet ports. The available options are:

• ETH1=HALF Duplex, ETH2=HALF Duplex

• ETH1=FULL Duplex, ETH2=HALF Duplex

• ETH1=HALF Duplex, ETH2=FULL Duplex

• ETH1=FULL Duplex, ETH2=FULL Duplex

The parameter for the Ethernet duplex mode is in the secure ORT.

To configure Ethernet duplex mode:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET DUPLEX

MODE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 0 , 1 , 2 , or 3 , and then press ENTER, where:

• 0—half duplex for both ports

• 1—full duplex mode for Ethernet 1 only

• 2—full duplex mode for Ethernet 2 only

• 3—full duplex mode for both Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2

The default is 0.

A message similar to the following appears:

PROCEEDING TO STORE DATA

(3) Configuring the Ethernet Port Address

You can configure the base IP address for each of the two Ethernet ports. The parameters that define the Ethernet port addresses are in the secure ORT.

To configure the Ethernet port addresses:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET 1

ADDRESS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type an IP address using decimals ranging from 0-255, in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.

The default address for Ethernet 1 is 192.168.0.1. The default address for

Ethernet 2 is 0.0.0.0.

(4) Configuring the Ethernet Mask

You can configure the network mask for each of the two Ethernet ports. The parameters that define the Ethernet port network masks are in the secure ORT.

To configure the Ethernet port masks:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ETHERNET 1 MASK parameter.

2. Type an IP address using decimals ranging from 0-255, in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.

The default subnet mask for both Ethernet ports is 255.255.255.0.

23-15-30

6-10

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Configuring Networking Parameters For Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2

(1) Configuring the Host Name

You can configure the host name for the HSD-440 terminal with a string of up to 20 characters. The parameter for the host name is in the secure ORT.

To configure the host name:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HOST NAME parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type the host name for the HSD-440 terminal using a maximum of up to 20 characters, and then press ENTER.

The default is DataIO.

(2) Configuring the Access Concentrator Name

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the access concentrator name parameter to differentiate between PPPoE devices. The access concentrator name can include up to 20 characters. The access concentrator name parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the access concentrator name:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ACCESS

CONCENTRATOR NAME parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type a name of up to 20 characters, and then press ENTER.

A message indicating that the DATA I/O parameter block is updated appears.

The default is DataIO.

(3) Configuring the SNMP Server

The SNMP server parameter enables and disables the SNMP server. This parameter is in the secure ORT.

To enable the SNMP server:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SNMP SERVER parameter, and the press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type the number next to the enabled or disabled option, and then press ENTER.

The default is ENABLED.

(4) Configuring the SNMP Community String

You can define an SNMP community string with up to 32 characters. This parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the SNMP community string:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SNMP COMMUNITY

STRING parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type a name up to 32 characters in length, and then press ENTER.

The default is PUBLIC.

23-15-30

6-11

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(5) Configuring the TFTP Server

You can enable and disable the TFTP server. The TFTP server parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the TFTP server:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TFTP SERVER parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the TFTP server, at the prompt, type yes , or to disable the TFTP server, type no , and then press ENTER.

The default is ENABLED.

(6) Configuring the DHCP Client

You can enable and disable the DHCP client on Ethernet port one. The DHCP client parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the DHCP client:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ENABLE DHCP

CLIENT parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the DHCP client, at the prompt, type yes , or to disable the DHCP client, type no , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(7) Configuring the DHCP Server

You can enable and disable the DHCP server on Ethernet port one. The DHCP server parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the DHCP server:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ENABLE DHCP

SERVER parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the DHCP server, at the prompt, type yes , or to disable the DHCP server, type no , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(8) Configuring Telnet Access

You can enable and disable the Telnet server. The Telnet server parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure Telnet access:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TELNET ACCESS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the Telnet server, at the prompt, type yes , or to disable the Telnet server, type no , and then press ENTER.

The default is ENABLED.

(9) Configuring the Managed Range

You can configure the starting IP address provided to DHCP clients if the DHCP server is enabled. The managed range parameter is in the secure ORT.

23-15-30

6-12

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure the managed range:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the START OF MANAGED

RANGE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type the starting address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, and then press ENTER.

The default is 192.168.0.100.

(10)Configuring the Number of Managed Addresses

You can configure the number of managed addresses provided to DHCP clients if the DHCP server is enabled. The parameter for the number of managed addresses is in the secure ORT.

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the NUMBER OF

MANAGED ADDRESSES parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type a value between 1 and 100, and then press ENTER.

The default value is 50.

(11) Configuring the Access Point Name

When configuring SBB services, you can configure the access point name in the secure ORT.

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ACCESS POINT

NAME parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type a name, and the press ENTER. An example name is stratos.bgan.inmarsat.com.

The default value is null.

Configuring Avionics Parameters

(1) Configuring the Primary Inertial Reference System (IRS)

You can configure the type of equipment that provides input to the primary IRS (IRS

#1). The available options are:

• Inertial—default

• GNSS

• Hybrid

The primary IRS parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the primary IRS type:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PRIMARY IRS TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 0 , 1 , or 2 , and then press ENTER, where:

• 0—INERTIAL (default)

• 1—GNSS

• 2—HYBRID

23-15-30

6-13

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(2) Configuring the Secondary IRS

You can configure the type of equipment that provides input to the secondary IRS

(IRS #2). The available options are:

• Not installed—default

• Inertial

• AES ID

• GNSS

• Hybrid

The secondary IRS parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the secondary IRS type:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECONDARY IRS

TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , or 4 , and then press ENTER, where:

• 0—NOT INSTALLED (default)

• 1—INERTIAL

• 2—AES ID

• 3—GNSS

• 4—HYBRID

The default is Not Installed.

(3) Configuring the Secondary IRS Input Speed

You can set the receive data rate for the secondary IRS ARINC 429 bus. This parameter is in the secure ORT.

To set the secondary IRS input speed:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SECONDARY IRS

INPUT SPEED SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To set the IRS ARINC 429 bus data receive speed rate to high rate, type 1 , or to set the bus speed to low rate, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default speed is high rate.

(4) Configuring GNSS Equipment

You can enable and disable the GPS protection algorithm depending on the

GPS/GLONASS equipment installed in the aircraft. The available options are:

• None

• GPS—default

• GPS Augmented by GLONASS

The parameter for GNSS equipment is in the secure ORT.

23-15-30

6-14

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure GNSS equipment:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the A/C GNSS

EQUIPMENT parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 0 , 1 , or 2 , and then press ENTER, where:

• 0—disables GPS protection on an aircraft that does not have GPS augmented by GLONASS navigation equipment installed

• 1—enables GPS protection on an aircraft that has GPS navigation equipment installed

• 2—enables GPS protection on an aircraft that has GPS augmented by

GLONASS navigation equipment installed

The default is GPS.

(5) Configuring the ICAO Code Source

You can provide the ICAO code by strapping or from the ARINC 429 source. You can use the ARINC 429 source only if the Secondary IRS Type parameter is set to

AES ID.

The ICAO code source parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the ICAO code source:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ICAO CODE SOURCE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To configure A429 SOURCE as the source, type 1 , or to configure STRAP inertial as the source, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is STRAP.

K. Configuring Satellite Service ORT Parameters

(1) Configuring the Forward ID

You can configure the six-digit hexadecimal Forward ID required for Swift 64 services.

The Forward ID is in the secure ORT.

To configure the Forward ID:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the FORWARD ID parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To define the forward ID, type the forward ID, then press ENTER.

The default forward ID is 000000—this forward ID does not allow access to the satellite network.

NOTE: Power cycle the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to activate the new Forward

ID.

23-15-30

6-15

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(2) Configuring Satellite Information

You can configure the name, location, and service available from up to eight satellites. This does not allow access to the satellite network. Satellite information is in the secure ORT. The default settings are:

Entry # Region

Satellite Name and

Longitude

AORW (W) 53.0W

AORE (E) 15.5W

3 2

4 3

POR (P), 178.0E

IOR (I) 64.0E

MTSAT (4) 142.5E

APAC (5), 144 E

EMEA (6), 25.0E

AMERICAS (7) 98.0 W

CLASSIC

Services

AERO, SWIFT64

AERO

AERO, BGAN

To configure satellite information:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SATELLITE NAMES parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type the number of the ENTRY you want to modify, and then press ENTER.

A prompt appears. For example:

EDITING ENTRY #1 REGION 0:

NAME [AORW] ?

3. At the NAME prompt, type the satellite name and then press ENTER.

4. At the ABBREVIATION prompt, type an abbreviation for the satellite name and then press ENTER.

5. At the LONGITUDE prompt, type the longitude and then press ENTER.

6. At the SATELLITE SERVICES prompt, identify the service and then press

ENTER. You can specify one or more of the following:

• Type A for AERO

• Type S for SWIFT64

• Type B for SBB

NOTE: To specify more than one service, for example, classic AERO and Swift

64, type AS .

7. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y , or to cancel, type N .

23-15-30

6-16

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(3) Configuring GES Service Provider Information

You can configure the GES Name, satellite ID, GES ID, and priority for up to 33

GESs. GES information is in the secure ORT. Note the GES ID in the following table is an Octal number. The default settings are:

GES Name

Aussaguel

Eik

Aussaguel

Eik

Perth

Santa Paula

Perth

Eik

Hawaii

Fucino

Hawaii

Satellite ID

GES ID

103

104

205

202

305

301

120

220

320

Priority

To configure GES service provider information:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the GES SERVICE

PROVIDER TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

A prompt appears. For example:

OTHER ENTRIES ARE EMPTY -- ENTER NUMBER OF ENTRY TO

EDIT (1,33) ?

2. At the ENTRY prompt, type the entry number to add or edit and then press

ENTER.

3. At the SATELLITE prompt, type the number of the satellite ID and then press

ENTER.

4. At the GES [octal]?

prompt, type the number (in Octal) of the GES ID and then press ENTER.

5. At the PRIORITY prompt, type a number between 1 and 10 and then press

ENTER.

6. At the GES NAME prompt, type in the GES name and then press ENTER.

7. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y , or to cancel, type N .

23-15-30

6-17

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(4) Configuring the Frequency Table

The Frequency Table defines the Global Band (SBB) and PSID (Areo H/H+) frequencies for up to eight satellites. You can configure two or more frequency pairs and NCS (S64) for each service type. The Frequency Table is in the secure ORT.

The default settings are:

Entry # Region

Service Type Frequencies

AERO PSID FREQS: $3702, $36B8

AERO PSID0 FREQS: $36FE, $36B6

AERO PSID FREQS: $36B4, $3700

AERO PSID FREQS: $36B2, $36FC

AERO PSID FREQS: $38F7, $38F7

Global Beam FREQS: $2AF2, $302A

Global Beam FREQS: $2BA0, $309E

Global Beam FREQS:$2A4C, $3004

Frequencies

NCS FREQS: $2AAC,$30E0

NCS FREQS: $2AB0,$30E4

AERO PSID FREQS: $36DA, $36DA

AERO PSID FREQS: $36DE, $36DE

AERO PSID FREQS: $36DC,$36DC

To configure the Frequency Table:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the FREQUENCY TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type the ENTRY number you want to edit and then press ENTER.

3. At the SBB GLOBAL BEAM FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press ENTER.

4. At the AERO PSID FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press

ENTER.

5. At the SWIFT64 NCS FREQS prompt, type the frequency pair and then press

ENTER.

6. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y , or to cancel, type N .

NOTE: You must enter a minimum of two frequency pairs per service type for each satellite up to a maximum of eight satellites. Frequency pairs are hexadecimal, with values separated by a comma, for example,

$3702, $36B8.

23-15-30

6-18

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(5) Configuring LES Service Provider Information

The LES Service Provider Table can hold LES parameters for up to eight satellites.

The LES parameters are the satellite name and LES ID. The LES service provider information is in the secure ORT. The default settings are:

Entry #

Satellite

AORW

AORE

POR

IOR

MTSAT

APAC

EMEA

AMERICAS

LES ID

LES 0

To configure LES service provider information:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the LES SERVICE

PROVIDER TABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type the ENTRY number you want to edit and then press ENTER.

3. At the LES prompt, type the LES number and then press ENTER.

4. At the NETWORK ID prompt, type the network ID and then press ENTER.

5. At the LES NAME prompt, type the LES name and then press ENTER.

6. At the SAVE ENTRY prompt, to save the changes, type Y , or to cancel, type N .

(6) Configuring the SwiftBroadband Timing Mode

The SBB timing mode determines the timing precision used by the Radio Access

Network. The timing modes are: GPS Assisted, Not Assisted, and Auto

Determination. The default setting is Not Assisted. The SBB timing mode is in the secure ORT.

To configure the SBB timing mode:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SWIFTBROADBAND

TIMING MODE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 0 , 1 , or 2 , and then press ENTER, where:

• 0—Not Assisted—default

• 1—GPS Assisted

• 2—Auto Determination

The auto determination state uses a lookup of the primary IRS type and secondary IRS type ORT parameters. If either specifies GNSS, or HYBRID type labels, the SwiftBroadband timing mode is GPS assisted. If GNSS, or HYBRID

23-15-30

6-19

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not specified, is not assisted. If the timing mode is not assisted, the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal is set as Aeronautical Class without GPS BGAN terminal.

(7) Configuring the Priority Service for Channel Card One

Channel card one can access SBB and Swift 64 services. You can assign the priority service with the following options:

• SWIFT64 ONLY

• SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64—default

• SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 ONLY

• SWIFT64 REVERTING TO SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6

The priority service is in the secure ORT.

To configure the priority service for channel card one:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CARD #1 SBB/S64

PRIORITY parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 0 , 1 , 2 , or 3 and then press ENTER, where:

• 0—SWIFT64 only on CC1

• 1—SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO SWIFT64

• 2—SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 ONLY

• 3—SWIFT64 REVERTING TO SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6

The default priority service is SWIFTBROADBAND CLASS 6 REVERTING TO

SWIFT64.

(8) Configuring the Service Type Priority

The service type priority parameter defines which service gets second priority for power when the requirements for priority three and above Aero H calls are satisfied.

The service type priority parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the service type priority:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SERVICE TYPE

PRIORITY parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To configure PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE, type 0 , or to configure SBB/S64, type 1 , and then press ENTER.

The default is PUBLIC CORRESPONDENCE.

L. Configuring Antenna ORT Parameters

(1) Configuring the Antenna Type

The antenna type parameter defines the type of antenna installed on the aircraft. The available options are:

• ARINC 781 HGA

• ARINC 781 IGA

• ARINC 741 HGA, Top Mount—default

23-15-30

6-20

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• ARINC 741 HGA, Side Mount

If a third MCDU is installed, the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal cannot use the side-mount antenna.

The antenna type parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the antenna type:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 2 , 4 , or 5 and then press ENTER, where:

• 2—ARINC 781 HGA

• 4—ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT

• 5—ARINC 741 HGA, SIDE MOUNT

The default is set to ARINC 741 HGA, TOP MOUNT.

(2) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Rotation Angle

The antenna mounting rotation angle defines the difference between the fore-aft axis of the antenna reference plane and the fore-aft axis of the aircraft. The rotation is measured counter-clockwise from the aircraft forward axis toward the antenna forward axis (or the port side).

The antenna mounting rotation angle parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the antenna mounting rotation angle:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA

MOUNTING ROTATION ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.

The default is 0.0.

(3) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Pitch Angle

The antenna mounting pitch angle defines the difference between the fore-aft axis of the antenna reference plane and the fore-aft axis of the aircraft. The pitch is measured in the nose-up direction from the aircraft forward axis toward the antenna forward axis.

The antenna mounting pitch angle parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the antenna mounting pitch angle:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA

MOUNTING PITCH ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.

The default is 0.0.

(4) Configuring the Antenna Mounting Roll Angle

The antenna mounting roll angle defines the difference between the port-starboard axis of the antenna reference plane and the port-starboard axis of the aircraft. The roll is measured in the starboard-up direction from the aircraft starboard axis toward the antenna starboard axis.

23-15-30

6-21

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The antenna mounting roll angle parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the antenna mounting roll angle:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ANTENNA

MOUNTING ROLL ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a value between 0 and 360, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.

The default is 0.0.

(5) Configuring the HPA to Antenna Loss

The HPA to antenna loss parameter defines the total loss (in dB) from the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal to the antenna input port, including the DLNA and DLNA to antenna cable losses. The HPA to antenna loss parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the HPA to antenna loss:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HSD (HPA)-

ANTENNA LOSS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a value between 0 and 5.0, to one decimal place, and then press ENTER.

The default is 2.5.

(6) Configuring the Diplexer

You can configure the type of diplexer installed in the aircraft. The available options are:

• Type A

• Type A Modified

• Type D

• Type F—default

Type F diplexers support SBB service.

The diplexer parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the diplexer:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the INSTALLED

DIPLEXER TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 0 , 1 , 2 , or 3 and then press ENTER, where:

• 0—diplexer TYPE A

• 1—diplexer TYPE A MODIFIED

• 2—diplexer TYPE D

• 3—diplexer TYPE F

The default is TYPE A.

23-15-30

6-22

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

M. Configuring MCDU ORT Parameters

(1) Configuring MCDU Wiring

The MCDU wiring parameter defines whether the MCDU can be wired or not wired.

There is a parameter for each of the devices. The MCDU wired parameters are in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the MCDU interface on the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI #x

WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER.

The prompt: MCDU/WSCI #x WIRED where x equals 1 appears.

2. To indicate that the MCDU #1 device is wired, type 1 , or to indicate that it is not wired, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default for the MCDU/WSCI #1 WIRED parameter is Yes.

(2) Configuring the MCDU Input Speed

You can configure the input bus speed to high or low. The input speed parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure MCDU input speed:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI INPUT

SPEED parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To set the input bus data speed to high rate, type 1 , or to set the bus speed to low rate, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default speed is low rate.

(3) Configuring the MCDU Output Speed

You can configure the output bus speed to high or low. The output speed parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure MCDU output speed:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI OUTPUT

SPEED parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To set the output bus speed to high rate, type 1 , or to set the output bus speed to low, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default output speed is set to high rate.

(4) Configuring the MCDU Controller Type

You can select the type of controller installed on the aircraft. The controller type parameter is in the secure ORT.

To configure the MCDU controller type:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU/WSCI

CONTROLLER TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To select the controller type MCDU, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is MCDU.

23-15-30

6-23

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(5) Configuring the MCDU Type

You can select the type of MCDU installed in the aircraft. The MCDU type parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the MCDU type:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU TYPE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. At the prompt, type 1 , 2 , 3 , or 6 and then press ENTER, where:

• 1—UNILINK

• 2—SMITHS

• 3—HONEYWELL

• 6—BOEING TECHSAT SIM

The default is UNILINK.

(6) Configuring the MCDU Font Colour

You can change the color of text on the MCDU screen. The MCDU font colour parameter enables the MCDU to display colours other than white. The MCDU FONT

COLOUR is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the MCDU font colour:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU FONT

COLOUR parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the MCDU font colour, type 1 , or to disable the MCDU font colour, type

0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(7) Configuring Manual Dialing

You can manually dial numbers using the MCDU keyboard. The manual dialing can be enabled or disabled. The ALLOW MANUAL DIAL parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure manual dialing:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the ALLOW MANUAL

DIAL parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable manual dialing, type 1 , or to disable manual dialing, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is ENABLED.

(8) Configuring Outgoing Call Pre-Selection

The COCKPIT OUTGOING CALL PRE-SELECT parameter enables users to pre-select air-to-ground calls and then dial the number using the Mic-On input or

MAKE CALL button on the MCDU. When this parameter is disabled, the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal dials air-to-ground calls immediately.

23-15-30

6-24

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure outgoing call pre-selection:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the COCKPIT OUTGOING

CALL PRE-SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable pre-selection, type 1 , or to disable pre-selection, type 0 , and then press

ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(9) Configuring the Address Book Categories

The address book defines a table that can hold up to 400 telephone numbers in 4 categories of up to 100 entries. Each entry includes:

• A phone number (maximum of 18 digits).

• A name (maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters).

• A priority for the phone number. The priority can be EMG, OP-HI, OP-LO, and

NON-OP, which correspond to priority (Q) numbers 15, 12, 10, and 9.

• A parameter to indicate whether the entry can be edited via the MCDU.

• A parameter to indicate the phone book category to which the entry belongs.

You can define up to four phone book categories in the MCDU address book. The category name can be up to ten characters in length. The category name parameters are in the secure partition of the ORT.

NOTE: If the ORT entry is empty, CATEGORY #x appears, where x is the number of the phone book category, between 1 and 4.

To configure the address book categories:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT

NAME 1 parameter.

2. Type the category name and then press ENTER.

3. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT

NAME 2 parameter.

4. Type the category name and then press ENTER.

5. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT

NAME 3 parameter.

6. Type the category name and then press ENTER.

7. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PHONEBOOK CAT

NAME 4 parameter.

N. Configuring the CMU

(1) Configuring CMU Wiring

You can configure if either of the two available CMUs is wired. The CMU #x WIRED parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

23-15-30

6-25

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure the CMU wiring:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU #x WIRED parameter, and then press ENTER.

The prompt: CMU #x WIRED? where x equals 1 or 2 appears.

2. To indicate that the CMU #1 or CMU #2 can be wired, type 1 , or to indicate that the CMU #1 or CMU #2 cannot be wired, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default for the CMU #1 WIRED parameter is YES (wired) and for the CMU

#2 WIRED parameter is NO (not wired).

(2) Configuring the CMU Input Speed

You can configure the input bus speed to high rate or low rate. The input speed parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure CMU input speed:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU INPUT SPEED

SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To set the CMU input bus speed to a high rate, type 1 , or to set the CMU input bus speed to a low rate, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is low rate.

(3) Configuring the CMU Output Speed

You can configure the output bus speed to high rate or low rate. The output speed parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure CMU output speed:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU OUTPUT SPEED

SELECT parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To set the CMU output bus speed to a high rate, type 1 , or to set the CMU output bus speed to a low rate, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is low rate.

(4) Configuring the CMU-SDU Join/Leave Word

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can send join/leave words periodically or only on logon and logoff events. The CMU-SDU join/leave word parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

NOTE: This parameter supports Universal brand CMU that reports a SAL that is different than the one it accepts when using a Williamsburg protocol.

To configure the CMU-SDU join/leave word:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU-SDU

JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To transmit join/leave words periodically, type 1 , or to transmit join/leave words on events, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is PERIODIC.

23-15-30

6-26

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(5) Configuring Hardcoded SAL

The CMU-SDU hardcoded SAL parameter determines the SAL used in SDU to CMU

Williamsburg messages. If this parameter is set to YES, a SAL of 304 is used regardless of the SAL reported to the CMU. If this parameter is set to NO, the SDU uses the SAL reported by the CMU. If a SAL is not present on the bus after one minute, the CMU uses a SAL of 304.The CMU-SDU HARD CODED SAL parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the hardcoded SAL:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the CMU-SDU HARD

CODED SAL parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable hardcoded SAL, type 1 , or to disable hardcoded SAL, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is ENABLED.

O. Configuring Terminal Operation

(1) Configuring Air/Ground Status Restrictions

Restrictions to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal operation are based on whether the terminal is on the ground or in the air. This parameter enables or disables those restrictions. The parameter for air/ground status restrictions is in the secure partition of the ORT.

When the air/ground status restriction parameter is enabled, the parameters for self-test in air and transmit on ground behave normally. If the air/ground status restriction parameter is disabled, the parameters for self-test in air and transmit on ground act as if they are enabled.

To configure air/ground status restrictions:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the AIR/GROUND

STATUS RESTRICTIONS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the air/ground status restrictions, type 1 , or to disable the air/ground status restrictions, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(2) Configuring Transmit on Ground

You can restrict the ability of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal to transmit on the ground.

The parameter for transmitting on the ground is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure transmit on ground:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the TRANSMIT ON

GROUND parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmission on the ground, type 1 , or to disable HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmission on the ground type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

23-15-30

6-27

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(3) Configuring Self-test in Air

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal’s MCDU or MPU can request a power-on self-test.

The ORT parameter Self-test in Air determines if the self-test is permitted or not when the aircraft is in the air. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure self-test in air:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SELF-TEST IN AIR parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the self-test in air type 1 , or to disable the self-test in air, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(4) Configuring Maintenance Command Execution in Air

You can reset the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using the MPU if you are logged into the MPU at the MENU or USER level. The Maintenance Command Execution in Air determines if the reset is permitted or not when the aircraft is in the air. The MAINT

CMD EXECUTION IN AIR parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure maintenance command execution in air:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MAINT CMD

EXECUTION IN AIR parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable maintenance commands in the air, type 1 , or to disable this feature, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(5) Configuring MCDU PAST

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can perform a power-on self-test according to a command from an MCDU. You can enable and disable this function with the MCDU

PAST parameter. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure MCDU PAST:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MCDU PAST parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the MCDU PAST, type 1 , or to disable the MCDU PAST, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is ENABLED.

(6) Configuring Field Loadable Software

The HSD-440 terminal can accept file transfers from user equipment connected to

Ethernet port one. You can enable and disable this function with the field loadable software parameter. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

23-15-30

6-28

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure field loadable software:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the SW FIELD

LOADABLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable the file transfers, type 1 , or to disable the file transfers, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(7) Configuring the Logon/Handover Policy

The logon/handover policy determines if the equipment automatically logs on, or waits to log on, or changes satellite when the instruction is received from the pilot.

The policy options are automatic and manual. The default policy is automatic. The logon/handover policy parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.

To configure the logon/handover policy:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the LOG-ON/HANDOVER

POLICY parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To select automatic logon, type 1 , or to select manual logon, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is AUTOMATIC.

(8) Configuring Logon Interrogation

The response to logon interrogation enables the AES to be interrogated. The logon interrogation parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.

To enable the logon interrogation:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the RESPONSE TO

LOG-ON INTERROGATION parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable interrogation, type 1 , or to disable interrogation, type 0 , and then press

ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(9) Configuring High-rate R/T in Global Beam

The High-rate R/T in global beam parameter enables or disables high-rate in Global

Beam. The high-rate R/T is in the user partition of the ORT.

To enable or disable high-rate R/T:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HIGH RATE R/T IN

GLOBAL BEAM parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable high-rate in Global Beam, type 1 , or to disable high-rate in Global

Beam, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(10)Masking Position in Logs

The HSD-440 terminal can record the position of the aircraft in the HSD-440 terminal logs. You can enable and disable the recording of position information with the mask position in logs parameter. This parameter is in the user partition of the ORT.

23-15-30

6-29

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

NOTE: This is the first of several checks that are performed before field software can be loaded.

To mask position in logs:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the MASK POSITION IN

LOGS parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. To enable position masking in logs, type 1 , or to disable position masking in logs, type 0 , and then press ENTER.

The default is DISABLED.

(11) Configuring HSD SAL

This parameter defines the SAL the terminal uses. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the HSD SAL:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the HSD SAL parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a three-digit hex value, and then press ENTER.

The default is 307.

Configuring Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Parameters

Inmarsat requires terminals to perform PIM tests before using SBB services. Section 5:

"Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test" on page 3-16 provides instructions for performing

the PIM test. This section describes ORT parameters related to the PIM test.

(1) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle

This parameter defines the azimuth point angle for PIMBIT offset from true north or true south when the terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the PIMBIT HGA Azimuth Offset Angle:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA

AZIMUTH OFFSET ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 15.0.

(2) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle

This parameter defines the azimuth point angle for the PIM test offset from true north or true south when the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the PIMBIT IGA Azimuth Offset Angle:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA AZIMUTH

OFFSET ANGLE parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 11.0.

23-15-30

6-30

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

(3) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle1

This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angl1e:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA

ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE1 parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 12.5.

(4) Configuring PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2

This parameter defines the second elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an IGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the PIMBIT IGA Elevation Offset Angle2:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT IGA

ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE2 parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 18.0.

(5) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1

This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle1:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA

ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE1 parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 12.5.

(6) Configuring PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2

This parameter defines the first elevation pointing angle for PIM test offset when the terminal is configured to operate with an HGA. This parameter is in the secure partition of the ORT.

To configure the PIMBIT HGA Elevation Offset Angle2:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT HGA

ELEVATION OFFSET ANGLE2 parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 27.5.

(7) Configuring PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio

This parameter defines the number of computed samples to discard from the PIM test calculations.

23-15-30

6-31

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To configure the PIMBIT Measurement Discard Ratio:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT

MEASUREMENT DISCARD RATIO parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 5.0.

(8) Configuring PIMBIT Failure Threshold

This parameter defines the failure threshold level for the PIM test in dBs of channel degradation.

To configure the PIMBIT Failure Threshold:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT FAILURE

THRESHOLD parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive decimal number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 3.0.

(9) Configuring PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold

This parameter defines the antenna beam pointing fail threshold for the PIM test.

To configure the PIMBIT Pointing Failure Threshold:

1. In the list of ORT parameters, type the number next to the PIMBIT POINTING

FAILURE THRESHOLD parameter, and then press ENTER.

2. Type a positive whole number, and then press ENTER.

The default is 1.

2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application

The ORT application provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for creating and saving ORT configuration files, modifying ORT parameters, and loading ORT configurations into the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

Using the ORT application, you can modify all of the same parameters (secure and user) that

are available through the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal MPU, as described in "Configuring ORT

Parameters Using the MPU" on page 6-1. After you modify ORT parameters, you must export

the changed configuration before loading it into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

This section provides information and instructions on how to use the ORT application, including:

•

Creating an ORT Configuration

•

Opening a Saved ORT Configuration

•

Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration

•

Exporting an ORT File

•

Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

23-15-30

6-32

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Searching for an ORT Parameter

A. Creating an ORT Configuration

Creating an ORT configuration includes:

• Opening the ORT file template

• Editing parameters

• Saving the ORT configuration

To open an ORT configuration template:

1. Double-click on the ortedit.exe

file.

The EMS ORT Application opens.

2. Click File , and then click Open Package .

The Choose ORT Package dialog box opens.

3. Navigate to the HSD440.ort

file and click Open .

The default ORT parameters appear in the EMS ORT Application window.

23-15-30

6-33

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The EMS ORT Application organizes ORT parameters into functional groups. You can access each group by clicking on its tab at the top of the window. A lock symbol marks groups of secure ORT parameters, and an open lock symbol marks the group of user

ORT parameters. Click the left and right arrows to see more tabs.

The functional groups of parameters are:

• Part Number—the part number of the Secure ORT

• Satellite Network

• MCDU

• CMC/CMU

• IRS

• Antenna

• 4-wire/POTS/CEPT-E1

• Routing

• Ethernet

• System

• User—all User parameters

23-15-30

6-34

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To edit ORT parameters:

1. Click on the tab for the functional group that contains the parameter you wish to edit.

2. Click on a parameter name in the Name column, then click on the parameter value in the Value column.

For parameters with text or numerical values, the cursor appears. For parameters with preset options, a menu appears.

NOTE: Some parameters are expandable. Click on the plus sign to the left of the parameter name to expand the parameter. Alternatively, right-click on the parameter name and click Expand all .

3. Type or select the new value for the parameter.

NOTE: To reset a parameter to its default value, right-click on the parameter and click Reset to default .

The ORT application can save an ORT configuration as an XML file. If you do not finish editing all the ORT parameters in one session, you can save the ORT configuration file and re-open it at a later time. The XML file is not uploaded to the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal, it can only be opened in the ORT application for parameter editing.

To save an ORT configuration file:

1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File , and then click Save As .

The Save As dialog box opens.

2. In the File name field, type a name for the new ORT configuration, and then click

Save .

The new ORT configuration is saved as an XML file.

B. Opening a Saved ORT Configuration

The EMS ORT Application saves ORT configurations as XML files. You can open these

XML files in the EMS ORT Application.

To open a saved ORT configuration:

1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File , and then click Open .

The Select a file dialog box appears.

2. Click on a saved ORT configuration and then click Open .

The saved ORT configuration appears in the EMS ORT Application window.

C. Importing a Phone Book Into the ORT Configuration

The EMS ORT Application can import data into its Address book parameter. The data in the Address book parameter includes:

• Name—the name displayed to identify the address book entry

• Number—the phone number

• Priority—the priority setting for calls to this number

• MCDU Editable—enables and disables changes to this entry from the MCDU

23-15-30

6-35

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The ORT Address book parameter includes four categories with 100 entries in each category. You can create and import a separate file for each category.

The EMS ORT Application creates address book entries from imported Comma

Separated Value (CSV) files that have the .csv file extension. You can create .csv files with Microsoft® Excel®.

Importing a phone book includes:

• Creating a .csv file

• Importing the .csv file into the EMS ORT Application

To create a .csv file:

1. Open Microsoft Excel.

2. Type the following into the specified cells, as shown below:

• cell A1—addressBook/addressBookCategory[1]

• The EMS ORT Application adds the entries in this file into Category 1 of the Address book.

• To create categories two, three, and four, change the category number inside the square brackets. You need to create a separate .csv file for each category.

• cell A2—abeName

• cell B2—abeNumber

• cell C2—abePriority

• cell D2—abeMCDUEditable

3. For each entry you want to add to the address book, type data in the columns abeName, abeNumber, abePriority, and abeMCDUEditable. Each row represents one address book entry:

• In column abeName, type the name of the address book entry. The maximum length of the name is 14 alphanumeric characters.

• In column abeNumber, type the phone number without hyphens or spaces.

The maximum length of the phone number is 18 digits.

• In the column abePriority, type the priority of this entry. Priority may be one of OP-HI, OP-LO, NON-OP, or EMG.

• In the abeMDCUEditable column, type YES or NO to indicate if this entry is editable from the MCDU.

23-15-30

6-36

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

4. Save the spreadsheet as a .csv file.

To import a .csv file:

1. Open the EMS ORT Application.

2. Open an ORT file or create a new file—refer to “Creating an ORT Configuration”

on page 6-33 and “Opening a Saved ORT Configuration” on page 6-35.

3. In the EMS ORT Application, click File , and then click Import Phonebook .

The Choose CSV File dialog box appears.

4. Click on the CSV file and then click Open .

The Import Phonebook message confirms the number of entries imported from the CSV file, and the EMS ORT Application adds the entries to the ORT configuration.

D. Exporting an ORT File

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal control processor uses a special file type that you can export from the EMS ORT Application. When you export a file, the EMS ORT Application creates two files—one for the control processor and one text (.txt) file for your reference.

To export an ORT file:

1. In the EMS ORT Application, click File , and then click Export .

The Choose Output File dialog box appears.

2. Type a new file name (no extension) in the File name box and then click Save .

The ORT configuration is exported (two files are created) and the Export

Document dialog box appears.

3. Click OK .

E. Loading an ORT File into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

You can load an exported ORT file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal through the

Ethernet connection.

To load the ORT file you’ll need:

• A computer with the tftp application

An ethernet cable

•

A serial cable—see section b: "Maintenance Port Cable Assembly" on page 4-37.

• The IP address of the terminal’s Ethernet 1 port

23-15-30

6-37

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

To load an ORT file into the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal:

1. Connect a computer to an Ethernet port and the Maintenance Port on the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

2. Copy the ORT file to the computer.

3. Start a HyperTerminal session to the Maintenance port of the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal.

Section c: "Interface Requirements" on page 4-38 provides the settings for this

connection.

4. To access the Maintenance Port Utility, type the password maint .

The password does not appear on the screen.

5. To navigate to Menu 2, press CTRL + N.

6. To allow tftp access to the terminal, in Menu 2, press l .

7. At the prompt, type the new password allowtftp .

A message confirms that tftp is allowed for ten minutes.

8. On your computer, click Start , and then click Run .

The Run dialog box appears.

9. In the Open field, type cmd .

The Command window appears.

10. Navigate to the directory that includes the new ORT file.

11. To load the ORT file, type tftp -i xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx put filename .

• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address of the Ethernet 1 port.

• filename represents the name of the new ORT file.

When the tftp application loaded the file to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, a short message confirms the number of bytes transferred.

12. To transfer the ORT parameters to the SCM, in Menu 3, press r .

13. At the prompt to transfer the ORT parameters to the SCM, type yesido .

The number of transferred bytes indicates the transfer progress.

The ORT file load is complete.

23-15-30

6-38

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

A: I

NMARSAT

ATELLITE

EAM

OVERAGE

Inmarsat operates strategically placed geostationary satellites called I-3 and I-4. I-3 satellites provide access to services such as Swift 64 and Aero H/H+, and I-4 satellites provide access to

SBB and Aero H/H+ services.

1. I-3 Satellites

Each I-3 satellite is located over and named after an OR. The four satellite ORs are:

• Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E)

• Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W)

• Indian Ocean Region (IOR)

• Pacific Ocean Region (POR)

Figure A-1 represents the ORs with approximate transfer coordinates for satellite transitions.

Figure A-1 ORs

23-15-30

A-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The four satellite ORs are made up of smaller, spot-beam coverage areas. The following maps show the Inmarsat satellite spot-beam coverage for the four ORs, and a composite map of the four regions combined.

NOTE: Figure A-2 and Figure A-3 depict Inmarsat's expectations of coverage but do not

represent a guarantee of service and should not be relied upon. The availability of service at the edge of coverage areas fluctuates depending upon a variety of conditions.

Figure A-2 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—Composite Map

23-15-30

A-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Figure A-3 Inmarsat I-3 Satellite Beam Coverage—OR Maps

23-15-30

A-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

2. I-4 Satellites

There are three I-4 satellites in service:

• I-4 Americas (98W)

• I-4 EMEA (25E)

• I-4 Asia-Pacific (143.5E)

Figure A-4 shows the I-4 satellite coverage regions.

Figure A-4 Inmarsat I-4 Satellite Beam Coverage Map

23-15-30

A-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

B: T

ROUBLESHOOTING

HECKLIST

Before performing the detailed testing and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual, read the following Troubleshooting Checklist. Use the Troubleshooting Checklist to make sure that you have not missed any key steps in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal setup.

1. Have you registered with a service provider to activate service?

You must activate an account with an Inmarsat-authorized service provider to access the Satellite Communications network using an HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. Contact

Inmarsat for a list of available service providers at:

Inmarsat Customer Care

99 City Road, London, EC1Y 1AX

Tel: +44 20 7728 1777

Fax: +44 20 7728 1142

E-mail: [email protected]

2. Has your account been activated?

Once registered, your HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is assigned terminal identification numbers called FWD IDs. If you have SBB service, service information also includes

IMSI. The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal must be strapped accordingly. Refer to

"Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed strapping and installation instructions.

NOTE: The service registration information may take a few days to be incorporated into the system databases at the LESGES level. New terminals being commissioned are not validated by the LES/GES until their customer database has been updated by Inmarsat to reflect the registration and activation of your terminal.

NOTE: To verify that the service registration information has been validated at the

LES/GES, call 33 POUND KEY for assistance. Confirm with the LES/GES operator that the FWD IDs assigned to your terminal are valid and active.

3. Is the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal seated properly?

In cases where the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not fully seated into the ARINC 600 connector (to the rear of the Fan Tray), the user may experience intermittent system operation. If intermittent system operation occurs:

• Check that the polarization pins are installed correctly as indicated on the applicable Outline and Installation diagram.

• Make sure that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is fully inserted into the tray and that the front hold-down screws are securely tightened.

23-15-30

B-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

4. Is all cabling attached correctly and securely?

Broken connections and improper cabling are the most common causes of HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal malfunctions. Before proceeding with testing and troubleshooting, complete the following checks:

• Check that all cables and wiring are routed and connected correctly and securely.

• Make sure that the terminal is installed with the correct power source.

• Verify that all external user and networking devices (for example: TAs, routers, fax, telephones, computers) are connected and configured properly.

5. Have any changes to the system been made?

For previously installed and functional terminals, make note of any changes made to the system since the last time the terminal functioned without problems.

• Were any new devices or systems connected to the terminal?

• Have any connecting devices or equipment been removed or replaced? If so, check that all new or replaced connections are attached and configured correctly.

• Have you changed service providers or re-configured the system in any way?

6. Are your Primary and Secondary LES/GES Access Codes programmed for all

ORs?

The system default for LES/GES access codes is set to 0 (zero), which must be

configured to valid LES/GES access codes before operation. Refer to "System

Operation" on page 2-1 for details.

7. Was the operational mode of the system strapped or configured correctly?

Verify that the system mode wiring straps match the installation configuration mode.

8. Are the SIM cards activated?

Activate report 69 and check that the OC column of the report shows ATCH (attached) then dial a SBB call.

9. Is the APN set?

Verify that the APN is set.

1. Navigate to Menu 3 in the Maintenance Port Utility.

2. In the list of ORT parameters, navigate to and type the number next to the miscellaneous EEPROM settings.

3. To view or set the APN, type the number next to the APN and then press ENTER.

10. Are GES preferences correctly set?

To verify GES preferences:

1. Navigate to Menu 3 in the Maintenance Port Utility.

2. In the list of ORT parameters, navigate to and type the number next to the Ocean

Region parameters.

23-15-30

B-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

3. To view GES preferences, type the number next to the GES preference, and then press ENTER.

The GES priority table appears.

The eNfusion® HSD High-speed Data Terminal Developer’s Guide,

MN-1252-13005, provides more information about GES preferences.

23-15-30

B-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

B-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

C: RJ45 C

ABLE

ERMINATION

ETAILS

23-15-30

C-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

C-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

D: I

NSTALLATION

LANNING

HECKLIST

Installation Planning Steps

1. Register the terminal for services (if applicable)

Record the following information (provided by Honeywell upon purchase)

Inmarsat Serial Numbers (ISN) x 1

IMSI #1

Contact your Service Provider and provide the 12-digit ISNs from above

Record the FWD IDs received (from your Service Provider or from Inmarsat) and corresponding Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMN)

FWD IDs

(last 6 digits of ISN)

IMNs

ISDN Speech

ISDN

(3.1 kHz audio)

ISDN 56 kbps

ISDN 64 kbps

MPDS

Service Provider

AOR-W

AOR-E

IOR

POR

2. Register the terminal for SBB services (if applicable)

APN

Master MSISDN

AMSISDN 1 ISDN 56 (RDI)

AMSISDN 1 ISDN64 (UDI)

23-15-30

D-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Installation Planning Steps

AMSISDN 5 CSFAX (3.1 kHz audio)

3. Pin Strapping

The following strapping is required

Item Strapped pins, e.g., TP1A to BP1A

System Mode

Data I/O

(if applicable)

4. Wiring

Antenna Multi-Control

BITE A/B

HPA Mute A/B

Power

ISDN:

Wire ISDN line. Channel 1 operates over ISDN 1 and channel 3 over

ISDN 2.

ISDN-1

ISDN-2

Ethernet:

Wire both Ethernet ports for SBB capability

Wire both Ethernet ports to deploy 2 separate networks

Ethernet-1

Ethernet-2

Inertial Navigation System (INS)

Analog Tip/Ring

5. Configuration

Program the Land Earth Station (LES)/Ground Earth Station (GES) Access Codes

Program devices with the Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN)

Configure the CNX Cabin Gateway if required

23-15-30

D-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

E: I

NSTALLATION

HECKLIST

Aircraft Identification:

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Installation Mode:

Checks completed by:

Approved/Witnessed by:

Name

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal Model No:

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal Serial No:

Signature Date

Section Parameter

Physical

Item

Service/maintenance access

Environmental considerations—see

"Environmental Requirements" on page 3-2

Plug configuration—see "Fan Tray

Requirements" on page 3-3

Fan Tray

Chassis bonding—see "Chassis Grounding" on page 3-4

Fan rotation—unobstructed

ARINC 600 Con. Polarized pins

N/A 9 Value

23-15-30

E-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

N/A 9 Section Parameter

Power

Connections

Voltage Levels

IRS Input (x2)

Config. Strap

Pins

Ethernet

ISDN

Remotes

RF Coaxial

Antenna

Configuration

CEPT

CMU/CMC

MCDU/WSCI

4-Wire (x2)

POTS

System

Power-Up

Item

+ 28 V dc polarity

115 V ac polarity

Chassis grounding

+ 28 V dc level

115 V ac level

IRS wiring

IRS format

SDI

System configuration

ICAO address

WOW (optional)

Wired to RJ45 distribution points (x2)

Wired to RJ45 distribution points

Manual reset switch operation

Maintenance port (DB9 access)

Power and fault indicators

Rx input cable loss

Tx output cable loss

Antenna manufacturer and type

Wired as per manufacturer

LES/GES access codes

ICAO ID

Wired to distribution point

Wired to equipment

Wired to distribution point

Visual LED indications

Power-up computer display

Reset message observed

System Logon

Logon verified for Swift 64 and SBB

Optional Checks

Ground segment

Flight segment

Move the aircraft in a circle and check the signal and C/No.

Value

23-15-30

E-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

315

330

345

360

255

270

285

300

195

210

225

240

135

150

165

180

105

120

Heading Antenna Antenna

(Deg) Selected Azimuth

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Swift 64 or SBB

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3

Classic

CH 4 CH 5

Note: Channels 3, 4, and 5 can be different than channels 1, and 2.

C/NoSignalC/NoSignalC/No SignalC/No SignalC/No Signal

23-15-30

E-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

E-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

F: CMU M

ESSAGES

The CMU communicates with the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using two types of communications:

Broadcast messages and Bit Oriented Protocol (BOP) messages. Both types of communication are supported at the same time.

This section includes descriptions of the messages that the CMU will transmit to the HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal and receive from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

In this communication type, the CMU uses an ARINC 429 bus to convey status word exchanges, join/leave words, and other control and command communications to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using conventional ARINC 429 broadcast techniques.

The CMU can transmit messages to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and receive messages from the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using this communication type.

1. Understanding Messages Transmitted to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

This section provides details about the words sent to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal from the CMUs:

•

Understanding System Identification Label 172

•

Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270

•

Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276

•

Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg

A. Understanding System Identification Label 172

Each CMU transmits system identification label 172 (SAL 304) to the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal. Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label. Any other SAL is ignored.

B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270

Each CMU transmits status word 1 to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The standby CMU checks to see if its status words are the same as the active CMU using its cross-talk connections.

Bit

Label

270

Table F-1 Status Word 1

Meaning

Determines the position of the CMU in the cockpit; see Table F-2

Determines which CMU is active and which is on standby

The HSD-440 terminal uses bit 20 to determine which CMU is active. When bit 20 is set, that CMU is active, and the other CMU should have its bit 20 cleared. In the event of an error and both CMUs are shown as active, the CMU on input port 1 is considered active.

23-15-30

F-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

The CMU transmits its position in the cockpit to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using bits

9 and 10, as shown in Table F-2.

SDI 1 (bit 9)

Table F-2 Bits 9 and 10 Positions

SDI 2 (bit 10)

Position

Single

Left

Right

Not used

Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label.

C. Understanding Status Word 2; Label 276

Each CMU transmits status word 2 to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal. The HSD-440 Mark

2 Terminal determines which CMU is sending the message based upon bits 9/10 (the

SDI) as detailed in Table F-2.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the SAT Link parameter (bit 19) to determine if the

CMU is receiving the appropriate link status from the HSD-440 terminal.

Attachment 6 from ARINC Characteristic 758 describes the word format of this label.

D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to SDU1 via Williamsburg

Data is transferred to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal using Williamsburg protocol.

Williamsburg messages use the SAL of the equipment they are talking to as the label. In this case, the label is 307 as the sub-system identifier label sent from the HSD-440 to

the CMU is 307. For more information, refer to "Understanding Word Format" on page

F-7.

2. Understanding Messages Received from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

This section provides details about the words sent from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal from the

CMUs:

•

Understanding System Identification Label 172

•

Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270

•

Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271

•

Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg

A. Understanding System Identification Label 172

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits subsytem identifier label 172 which contains the subsystem SAL in bits 9 to 16. The SAL is set to 307 (octal). Also:

• Bit 17 is set to indicate Inmarsat Aero

• Bits 18-31 are used for other Satcom services (or are spare) and are set to 0

23-15-30

F-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Bit 32 indicates parity

You can find the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal identity information in the ORT. If no information is available, the terminal identifies itself as SAL 307 by default.

ARINC 781 Supplement 1 describes the word format of these labels.

B. Understanding Status Word 1; Label 270

Bits are defined as shown in Table F-3.

Bit(s) Description

9–10 SDI (per ARINC

Specification 429

Section 2.1.4)

11 Data Link via CMU

Inactive

Table F-3 Status Word 1 Bits

If Set

• Set to 00 , all call

CMU 1 Inactive

Voice Unavailable

SELCAL

• HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not able to offer Aero H data services (due to a hardware fault or terminal is not logged on)

• ORT indicates that only CMU #1 is wired and label 270 is missing for 3 or more seconds

• ORT indicates that only CMU #2 is wired and label 270 is missing for 3 or more seconds

• ORT indicates that both CMU #1 and CMU #2 are wired and both label 270 are missing for 3 ore more seconds

• CMU #1 bus label 270 is missing for 3 or more seconds

• Label 270 SSM coded to fail

• Label 270 bit 20 is not set

• Class Aero is not logged on

• Login Class is 1 or 4 (data only)

This bit is set during the period when a ground to air call, including a preemptive call, is being signaled but unanswered. If set:

• Indicates that a new cockpit voice circuit has been established for a ground-initiated call

• Depending on the aircraft setting, this bit may result in a visual annunciation of the new call on the EICAS/ECAM/EDU and activation of the cockpit chime

• Crew should refer to the EICAS/ECAM/EDU to determine which system is annunciating the call

• Bit should remain set until an appropriate acknowledgement is received

• Crew should make sure that the bit has been cleared in all transmitted samples for at least two seconds prior to being set, and then set for at least four seconds or until the annunciation is acknowledged, whichever occurs last

23-15-30

F-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Bit(s) Description

15 Message Alert with

Chime

Table F-3 Status Word 1 Bits (Continued)

If Set

• Refer to MCDU messages for timely information

• Terminal should clear this bit once positive pilot response has been detected

• This bit is never set, it is reserved for future use.

16 Message Alert without

Chime

17 Not Logged-On

18 Master/Slave

19 CMU 2 Inactive

•

Terminal is not logged onto a ground station

This bit is never set, slave operation is not supported.

•

• CMU 2 transmission of valid Label 270 is detected inactive

• Label 270 SSM coded to fail on CMU #2

Cockpit Fault

Cockpit Voice Fault

Voice Call 1

Voice Call 2

Voice Alert 1

Voice Alert 2

• Label 270 bit 20 is not set

• Not used

• Terminal has detected a low priority (4) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 1

• Terminal has detected a low priority (4) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 2

• Terminal has detected a high priority (1, 2, or 3) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 1

• Terminal has detected a high priority (1, 2, or 3) flight deck incoming voice call on channel 2

• A cockpit voice communication is connected on channel 1 26 Cockpit Voice

Communication 1

27 Cockpit Voice

Communication 2

29 Data

• A cockpit voice communication is connected on channel 2

• Never set

• No active CMU is available at the SDU, or the active CMU does not respond with a Loop Word in response to a Test

Word

• This bit being set can be caused by the following:

• Bus inactivity on all CMU inputs

• Bus activity, but no declared active CMU

• Bit may be used to set a cockpit advisory message (for example, >SATCOM DATA) indicating to the flight crew a loss of data link capability due to a failure in the CMU interface.

* These bits are cleared when the chime light inhibit discrete signal is asserted.

23-15-30

F-4

3 JUN 10

Bits 28–26

Bit 29

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

C. Understanding Join/Leave Word; Label 271

Each of the Aeronautical Telecommunications Network (ATN) subnetworks transmits join and leave words to the CMU whenever a path to a specified ground address changes.

The join event notifies the CMU that a new path to a specified ground address is available, triggering ATN air-to-ground communications. The leave event notifies the CMU that a path to a specified ground address has been closed, ending ATN air-to-ground communications.

The Join/Leave word (label 271) is transmitted on the CMU bus at a minimum rate of once per second or be event driven based on log on and log off events as specified by the 'CMU - SDU JOIN/LEAVE WORD TRANSMISSION' ORT parameter.

Table F-4 shows the definitions of the bits in the join/leave word.

Bits

Bits 8–1

Bits 16–9

Bits 22–17

Bits 25–23

Bits 31–30

Table F-4 Join/Leave Word Bits

Defines

Word Label 271:

• Uses the A429 convention

• Coded as 10011101

GES ID:

• 0 is an invalid ID

• FF is used for all GESs

• ID numbers between 1 and FE are valid GES IDs

• GES ID is known to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

• Bits are cleared when the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on

Satellite ID

Inmarsat Service:

• Aero H+ 011

Not used; padded with zeros

Data link from the AES to the GES:

• Available (a Join message; Bit = 1)

• Not Available (a Leave message; Bit = 0)

• Identified by the GES ID and Satellite ID fields

• CMU uses this information to initiate network layer virtual circuits with available ground routers by determining the ground routers’ DTE addresses from the provided GES identity

• Bits 9–16, (GES) and Bits 17–22 (Satellite ID) uniquely identify a GES

• Aero Service Type field may be used by the CMU to make routing decisions

• Bit is cleared when the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on.

SSM information (ARINC 429 para 2.1.5.2)

23-15-30

F-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

D. Understanding Protocol File Transfer to CMU via Williamsburg

Data is transferred to the CMU using Williamsburg protocol. Williamsburg messages use the SAL of the equipment they are talking to as the label. In this case, the label is 304 as the sub-system identifier label sent from the HSD-440 to the CMU is 304. For more

information, refer to "Understanding Word Format" on page F-7.

NOTE: Universal brand CMUs broadcast a different SAL in Label 172, but expect transmission on a SAL of 304. This is achieved through the use of the CMU-SDU

HARD CODED SAL ORT parameter.

3. Understanding BOP Options

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal uses the following BOP options for the CMU interface. The ORT specifies the values for these options. If no information is available, then the options default to

the values shown in Table F-5.

Option

O10

O11

O12

Table F-5 BOP Option Defaults

Value

Half

ORT value

Yes (high-speed data terminal)

Yes

Notes

Half or Full Duplex Operation

High or Low Speed Bus

Low speed is default

Automatic CTS when ready

Accept Automatic CTS

System Priority to Resolve RTS Conflict

Spare

Use of SOLO word

(TEST/LOOP)

Spare

Destination code in RTS/CTS /NCTS/BUSY Used

Bit-Protocol verification

Use subsystem SAL from ALO word

23-15-30

F-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

4. Understanding LDUs and File Size

BOP messages use Link Data Units (LDUs) encoded in binary octets to transmit data. LDUs conform to the following rules:

• The data is transmitted from a source and is received by a sink.

• LDUs consist of a set of contiguous ARINC 429 32 bit data words.

• The initial data word of each LDU shall be a Start of Transmission (SOT) word.

• The end data word of each LDU shall be an End of Transmission (EOT).

• No data file shall exceed 255 LDUs.

5. Understanding LDU Size and Word Count

LDUs may vary in size from 3 to 255 ARINC 429 words. The minimum LDU consists of one

SOT word, one data word, and one EOT word, and the maximum LDU consists of one SOT,

253 data words, and one EOT.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal calculates word count when it organizes an LDU for transmission.

The word count appears in the RTS and CTS data words. See "Understanding Protocol Words" on page F-9.

6. Understanding Word Format

The general word format of a BOP word is given in ARINC 429 (Attachment 11, Table 11-A).

The bit definitions are shown in Table F-6.

Bit Position

8-1

24-9

28-25

31-29

Table F-6 BOP Word Format

Description

SAL

Data (28-9 for full data words)

GFI, control data or word type extensions

Word type

Parity bit

A. Understanding SALs

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal sends LDUs by point to point by using a label field to carry the destination SAL; therefore, each LDU that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal sends is prefixed by the SAL for the CMU, SAL 304.

The SAL for the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is 307 (if designated SDU 1) or 173 (if designated SDU 2). See ARINC 429, Part 1, attachment 1-1 for a complete list of all SALs.

B. Understanding Data

Data is sent in 4 or 5 nibble words. See "Understanding Word Types" on page F-8

23-15-30

F-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

C. Understanding General Format Identifier (GFI) Definitions

Table F-7 defines the GFI definitions.

File Type

Data 2 enveloped message

Table F-7 GFI Definitions

Label

304

CMU

Destination

Code

HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal

Label

307 (1)

Destination

Code

GFI

1110b (Eh)

A GFI of 1110 b indicates a data 2 Enveloped ACARS Message. This message indicates to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal that this message is to be passed on through the ACARS network. Only one message is transferred per link layer ARINC 429 file. If the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal is unable to deliver an enveloped message to its destination (CMU or

GES), the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal discards the message.

A data-2 HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits to the GES all messages passed from the avionics network interface during the time that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on. If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is not logged on, any messages passed to the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal shall be discarded. While the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is logged on, any messages received from the GES shall be forwarded to the avionics network interface regardless of the state or availability of the destination avionics equipment.

Any CMU message contains a destination code of M if it arrives from the ground to the

CMU. Similarly, any message originating from the CMU that is destined for a GES contains a destination code of S. These codes are embedded in the RTS, CTS, and

NCTS protocol words (See "Understanding Protocol Words" on page F-9).

7. Understanding Word Types

The word types in Table F-8 are valid. For a full definition, see ARINC 429 P3, attachment 11.

Table F-8 Word Types

WORD TYPE

Full Binary Data Word

Partial Binary Data Word

Start of Frame—Version 3

End of Frame—Version 3

Protocol Word

Solo Word

Start Of Transmission—Version 1

End Of Transmission—Version 1

23-15-30

F-8

3 JUN 10

RTS

Protocol word

(Request to Send)

CTS

(Clear to Send)

NCTS

(Not Clear to Send)

NAK

(negative acknowledgement)

ACK

(acknowledgement)

ALO

(aloha)

ALR

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

A. Understanding the Full Binary Data Word

This word shall transmit 5 nibbles of data. See ARINC 429P3 Attachment 11 for details.

B. Understanding the Partial Binary Data Word

This word shall transmit 4 or less nibbles of data. See ARINC 429P3 Attachment 11 for details.

C. Understanding Protocol Words

The protocol words are shown in Table F-9. The protocol identifier occupies bits 28-25

of the protocol word.

(aloha response)

Table F-9 Protocol Words and Uses

Uses

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal issues an RTS to the CMU when it is ready to send an LDU. The RTS contains a destination code (bits 24–

17) and a word count (bits 16–9).

When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives an RTS, it issues a CTS to the CMU when the CMU is ready to send an LDU. The CTS contains the same destination code and word count as the HSD-440 Mark 2

Terminal received in the RTS.

Bit 11 of the Status Word Label 270 from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal indicates when a satellite link is available to proceed if this is a ground destination message.

When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal either receives a valid RTS and is not ready to accept data or receives an RTS with an invalid destination or word count, it responds with an NCTS. The NCTS contains a destination code (bits 24–17).

If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal notes a missing SOT or EOT word, parity error, word count error, CRC error, or time out error, it will respond with a NAK. The NAK contains the same file sequence number in bits

24–17 as the SOT word.

If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transfers each word within the designated time and with odd parity, correct word count, and verified

CRC. The LDU is either next, first, or a duplicate. Then the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal sends an ACK. The ACK word contains the file sequence number (bits 24–17) and the LDU sequence number (bits 16–

9).

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can initiate BOP V1 communication by sending an ALO word out on the bus.

The first ALO word that the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits contains the highest version number it supports (bits 12–9). This word determines the correct protocol to use for the exchange. The ALO also sends its own

SAL (bits 24–17).

When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives an ALO word, it leaves its present task and responds with an ALR word. The response contains the protocol version level supported.

23-15-30

F-9

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

SYN

Protocol word

Destination code

Word count

Table F-9 Protocol Words and Uses (Continued)

Uses

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal transmits a SYN word to inform the CMU that the construction of the last file that was transmitted is confused. The reception of a SYN word causes the CMU to abort any reception or transmission in progress. In addition, if the CMU was transmitting, it should re-initiate transmission of the file that was aborted.

RTS, CTS, and NTCS words use a destination code. The destination code field (when used, bits 24–17) indicates the final destination of the

LDU. If the LDU will be used in the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal, the destination code can be set to 00h. If the LDU is intended to be passed on to another onboard system, the destination code indicates that system.

RTS and CTS words use a word count. The word count field (bits 16–9) reflects the number of ARINC 429 words that will be transmitted in a subsequent LDU. The maximum word count value is 255 ARINC 429 words.

D. Understanding the Solo Word

If the data the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal is sending consists of only 1 or 2 octets, then the data can be sent blind using the solo word instead of obtaining a CTS. Solo words conform to the following rules:

• The solo word contains a 16 bit data field in bits 24–9

• Bits 31–29 are permanently set to 101b

• Solo words are not acknowledged at the link level

• Solo words are not interleaved with data file words during a data file transfer, however if the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a solo word during data transfer, the

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal shall process the solo word normally and resume file transmission or reception.

The solo word also performs test and loop back functions to test the integrity of the ARINC

429 bus interconnection between the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal and the CMU.

The HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal can send a 16 bit loop test pattern word (TEST) on the

ARINC 429 TX bus. The CMU then responds with the identical loop test pattern word

(LOOP) on the ARINC 429 RX bus. If the LOOP does not match the TEST, the HSD-440

Mark 2 Terminal indicates a TEST failure.

If the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a TEST on its ARINC 429 RX bus, it responds by transmitting an identical LOOP on the ARINC 429 TX bus.

A 4 bit identifier (bits 28–25) identifies the nature of the data being sent by the solo word.

The three types of data are shown in Table F-10.

Purpose

Test

Table F-10 Data Types

Bits 28-25b

0000b

Description

16 Bit Test Pattern

23-15-30

F-10

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Loop

Solo Word

Table F-10 Data Types (Continued)

0001b

16 Bit Loop Back

16 Bit Data Filed

E. Understanding Start of Transmission (SOT)

When the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal receives a valid CTS with the destination code and word count of the previous RTS, then it responds by sending an SOT word immediately before the LDU. The SOT contains the file sequence number, the GFI, and the LDU sequence number.

The file sequence number (bits 24–17) of the SOT word is an 8 bit number assigned to the data file. It is initialized to 00h and increments by 1h for each new file sent over the link. After reaching FFh, the file sequence number returns to 01h and recommences incrementing by 1h for each new file sent. A file consisting of multiple LDUs has the same file sequence number in each SOT word of each LDU. The file sequence number is also used in ACK and NAK words.

The LDU sequence number (bits 16–9) of the SOT word is an 8 Bit number assigned to the LDU. It is initialized to 00h and increments by 1h for each LDU sent (of the same file).

The LDU sequence number resets to 00h at the beginning of each new file. The LDU sequence number is also used in the ACK word.

Understanding End of Transmission (EOT)

Each LDU is terminated by an EOT word. Bit 25 indicates if this LDU is the final LDU of the transfer. If it is, then this bit shall be set to 1; if it is not the final LDU, it shall be set to

0. The EOT also contains the CRC word in bits 24–9. See ARINC 429 P3, paragraph

2.5.12, for details on generating and decoding the CRC word.

23-15-30

F-11

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

F-12

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

G: I

NTERNATIONAL

CCESS AND

OUNTRY

ODES

Table G-1 shows a list of countries with their associated country codes and international access

codes.

Country

Afghanistan

Albania

Algeria

Angola

Anguilla

Antigua

Argentina

Armenia

Aruba

Australia

Austria

Bahamas

Bahrain

Bangladesh

Barbados

Belarus

Belgium

Belize

Benin

Bermuda

Bolivia

Bosnia and Hercegovina

Botswana

Brazil

British Virgin Islands

Bulgaria

Burkina Faso

Burma (Myanmar)

Burundi

Cambodia

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes

355

213

244

+1 (264)

+1 (268)

374

297

+1 (242)

973

880

+1 (246)

375

501

229

+1 (441)

591

387

267

+1 (284)

359

226

257

855

Country Code

011

001

810

011

00 10

011

00 11

011

International Access Code

23-15-30

G-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)

Country

237

Country Code

Cameroon

Canada

Cape Verde

Cayman Islands

Central African Republic

Chad

Chile

China

Colombia

Comoros

Congo (Brazzaville) 242

Congo (Kinshasa, formerly Zaire) 243

269

238

+1 (345)

236

235

Cook Islands

Costa Rica

Cote d'Ivoire (Ivory Coast)

Croatia

682

506

225

385

Cuba

Cyprus

Czech Republic

Denmark

Diego-Garcia

Djibouti

Dominica

Dominican Republic

East Timor

Ecuador

Egypt

El Salvador

Equatorial Guinea

Eritrea

Estonia

Ethiopia

Falkland Islands

Faroe Islands

Fiji

Finland

France

357

420

246

253

+1 (767)

+1 (809), +1 (829)

670

593

503

240

291

372

251

500

298

679

358

011

119

810

009

International Access Code

011

23-15-30

G-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)

Country

French Antilles

French Guiana

French Polynesia

Gabon

Gambia

Germany

Ghana

Gibraltar

Greece

Greenland

Grenada

Guam

Guatemala

Guinea

Guinea-Bissau

Guyana

Haiti

Honduras

Hong Kong

Hungary

Iceland

India

Indonesia

Iran

Iraq

Ireland

Israel

Italy

Ivory Coast (Cote d'Ivoire)

Jamaica

Japan

Jordan

Kazakstan

Kenya

Kuwait

Kyrgyz Republic

Laos

590

594

689

241

220

233

350

299

+1 (473)

+1 (671)

502

224

245

592

509

504

852

354

964

353

972

Country Code

225

+1 (876)

962

254

965

996

856

010

810

000

001

900

001

011

001, 008

011

009

International Access Code

23-15-30

G-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Latvia

Lebanon

Lesotho

Liberia

Libya

Liechtenstein

Lithuania

Luxembourg

Country

Macao

Macedonia

Madagascar

Malawi

Malaysia

Maldives

Mali

Malta

Marshall Islands

Martinique

Mauritania

Mauritius

Mayotte and Reunion

Mexico

Micronesia

Moldova

Monaco

Mongolia

Montenegro

Montserrat

Morocco

Mozambique

Namibia

Nauru

Nepal

Netherlands

New Caledonia

New Zealand

Nicaragua

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)

264

674

977

687

505

222

230

262

223

356

692

596

691

373

377

976

382

+1 (664)

212

258

261

265

960

370

352

853

389

371

961

Country Code

266

231

218

423

011

001

356

011

101

International Access Code

810

23-15-30

G-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)

Country

Niger

Nigeria

Niue Island

North Korea

Northern Mariana Islands

(Commonwealth of)

Norway

Oman

Pakistan

Palau

Palestine

Panama

Papua New Guinea

Paraguay

Peru

Philippines

Poland

Portugal

Puerto Rico

Qatar

Romania

Russia

Rwanda

Samoa

San Marino

Saudi Arabia

Senegal

Serbia

Seychelles

Sierra Leone

Singapore

Slovakia

Slovenia

Solomon Islands

Somalia

South Africa

South Korea

227

234

Country Code

683

850

+1 (670)

968

680

970

507

675

595

351

+1 (787)

974

250

685

378

966

221

381

248

232

421

386

677

252

International Access Code

009

011

001

011

810

002

095

011

23-15-30

G-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)

Country

Spain

Sri Lanka

St Helena and Tristan da Cunha

St Kitts

St Lucia

St Pierre and Miquelon

St Vincent

Sudan

Suriname

Swaziland

Sweden

Switzerland

Syria

Taiwan

Tajikistan

Tanzania

Thailand

Togolese Republic

Tokelau

Tonga

Trinidad and Tobago

Tunisia

Turkey

Turkmenistan

Turks and Caicos

Tuvalu, Ellice Islands

U.S. Pacific Islands

U.S. Virgin Islands

Uganda

Ukraine

United Arab Emirates

United Kingdom

United States

Uruguay

Uzbekistan

Vanuatu

290

+1 (869)

+1 (758)

508

+1 (784)

249

597

268

963

886

992

255

228

690

676

+1 (868)

216

993

Country Code

+1 (649)

688

+1 670, +1 671,

+1 684

598

998

678

+1 (340)

256

380

971

011

810

011

001

002

810

000

002

011

International Access Code

011

000

810

011

810

23-15-30

G-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Country

Vatican City

Venezuela

Vietnam

Wallis and Futuna

Yemen

Yugoslavia

Zambia

Zimbabwe

Table G-1 International Access and Country Codes (Continued)

Country Code

+39, +379

681

967 00

(+38 discontinued) 99

260

263

International Access Code

110

23-15-30

G-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

G-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

PPENDIX

H: I

NMARSAT

AUSE

ODES

Table H-1 defines the maintenance port menu fault codes of the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal.

1281

1291

1351

1361

1362

1363

1391

1392

1092

1141

1142

1143

1144

1145

1146

1202

Inmarsat Cause Code

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions

Code Definition

1001

1011

Call cleared by MES terminal (normal termination of call)

Call failed, MES terminal busy

1012

1021

1081

1091

Call cleared, MES terminal busy

Call failed, MES time-out (no answer)

Call failed, MES terminal not installed

Call failed, MES terminal out-of-service

Call cleared, MES terminal out-of-service

MES preempted clear by higher priority call

MES preempted fixed call by higher priority call

Offered call cleared, pre-empted at MES

Call cleared, MES initiated preemption

Attempted call cleared, pre-empted at MES

Attempted call abandoned by MES terminal

Handover, MES ready

1393

1451

1452

Call failed, MES cannot accept

Call failed, MES cannot accept at present

Call cleared, insufficient free memory

Call cleared by MES cable unwrap

Call cleared, long interruption in reception at MES

MES secondary clear due to re-point OR

Call cleared, traveled distance exceeds 700km

Call cleared, spot beam transition (call terminated because aircraft left spot beam)

Call cleared, cooperative mode

Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested

Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit)

23-15-30

H-1

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

1853

1854

1855

1856

1857

2000

2001

2010

2011

2012

2020

1841

1842

1843

1844

1851

1852

1592

1651

1661

1662

1790

1791

1811

1812

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

1502

1551

1581

1591

Handover, LES Ready, normal clear

Call failed, LES congested (no channel)

Call failed, service not provided at this LES

Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES

Call cleared, credit card type not supported

Call failed, LES congested (no channel terminal)

Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES

LES long term blockage of SCPC MES

Call cleared, failure credit card validation process

Call cleared, failure authentication process

NCS MES ID busy

NCS MES ID busy IPDS

Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.1 call

Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.2 call

Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.3 call

Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption

Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject no SCPC available

Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject SCPC does not match request

Call failed, lease channel congestion

Call failed, MES outside spot beam coverage area

Call rejected, preemption failed, no channel available

Call rejected, spot beam selection failed

Handover failed, channel not available

MES int reject MES RQ invalid CNO

MES int reject MES RQ failed qualification

MES int reject MES RP invalid CNO

MES int reject MES RP failed qualification

MES int reject MES RP operation timeout

MES int reject NCSA missing

23-15-30

H-2

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

2059

2060

2061

2062

2063

2070

2071

2080

2051

2052

2053

2055

2056

2057

2058

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

2021

2022

2023

MES int reject NCSA invalid CNO

MES int reject NCSA failed qualification

2024

2025

Call failed, Signal lost on NCSA during call setup, check antenna and try again

Call failed, Missing channel assignment, try again

2030

2040

2041

2048

Call failed, Signal lost on NCSC during call setup, check antenna and try again

MES int reject LES ID failed qualification

MES int reject SCCS invalid CNO

MES int reject SCCS not paired

Call failed, invalid number dialed

2049

2050

Call failed, terminal not ready for call, try later

Call failed, Not allowed to make another mobile call yet, wait 20 seconds and try again

Call failed, dialed number is barred

Call failed, LES selected is barred

Call failed, number dialed must be in a phonebook

Call failed, terminal can only be used with a valid SIM

Call failed, user not logged in

Call failed, user not logged in to SIM

Call failed, LES is not in SIM allowed list

Call cleared, SIM removed during call

Call failed, terminal is locked for outgoing calls

MES int reject NCSS failed qualification

MES int reject spot beam invalid

Call failed, no spot beams in the ocean region, select another OR

Terminal ID is not set correctly, check with dealer

Lost NCSC signal, seeking

Stand-Alone Mode finished, seeking network

SIM error, check SIM is inserted correctly

23-15-30

H-3

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

8000

8001

8002

8010

8011

8012

8013

8014

8018

2106

2120

2200

2201

2300

2301

2302

2400

2094

2095

2100

2101

2102

2103

2104

2105

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

2090

2091

2092

2093

MES int reject ORR query invalid

MES int reject ORR invalid

MES int reject MES RR failed qualification

MES int reject MES RR invalid CNO

MES int reject NCRA missing

MES int reject NCRA lost lock

MES int reject illegal call type

MES Int reject illegal peripheral

Call request failed, call already in progress

Call failed, star code is badly formatted

Call failed, cannot accept two address book star codes

Call failed, address book entry not found

Call failed, star code does not exist

MES int reject no transmit power available

Battery flat for terminal operation

Call cleared, used all allocated time for call type

MES int reject no coop response

MES int reject no power

MES int reject no location report

MES int reject no ORA SU found

ACSE Recycling

ACSE Top Of Find BB

ACSE Top Of Process BB

ACSE Finding Primary NCS Long

ACSE Finding Secondary NCS Short

ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Short

ACSE Finding Primary NCS Short

ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Long

ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Short

23-15-30

H-4

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

8210

8211

8300

8301

8302

8303

8304

8305

8306

8100

8110

8120

8200

8201

8202

8203

8204

8023

8024

8025

8030

8040

8041

8080

8081

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

8019

8020

8021

8022

ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Long

ACSE Found Primary NCS

ACSE Found Secondary NCS

ACSE Found Primary Standalone

ACSE Found Secondary Standalone

ACSE found primary NGNCS

ACSE found secondary NGNCS

ACSE NSR Invalid

ACSE Inert

ACSE ODU Status

ACSE NSR Valid

ACSE NSR Valid LES A

ACSE Booting

ACSE Booted

ACSE FIDR ID Invalid

ACSE Spot Beam Selection

ACSE Next Spot Beam

ACSE Successful Spot Beam Selection

ACSE Failed To Find Spot Beam

ACSE Spot Beam Selective Clear

ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No ID

ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No TDM

ACSE ORR

ACSE Successful ORR

ACSE Failed ORR

ACSE No ORR

ACSE ORR Tune NCRA

ACSE ORR MES RR

ACSE failed retry ORR

23-15-30

H-5

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

8502

8503

8510

8511

8520

8521

8580

8581

8582

8481

8482

8483

8484

8485

8486

8500

8501

8400

8401

8402

8410

8411

8420

8421

8480

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

8310

8311

8312

8313

ACSE ORR Query Begin

ACSE ORR Query Burst

ACSE ORR Query Successful

ACSE ORR Query Failed

ACSE Fixed Begin

ACSE Fixed MESRP

ACSE Fixed Call Type Set

ACSE Fixed Tune NCSA

ACSE Fixed Channel Assignment

ACSE Fixed Clearing Call

ACSE Fixed Selective Clear

ACSE Fixed SCPC Begin

ACSE Fixed SCPC Transmitting

ACSE Fixed Authentication Begin

ACSE Fixed Authentication End

ACSE Fixed Power Control

ACSE Fixed MES Connect

ACSE Fixed Ringing Begin

ACSE Mobile Begin

ACSE Mobile MES RQ1

ACSE Mobile MES RQ2

ACSE Mobile Call Type Set

ACSE Mobile Tune NCSA

ACSE Mobile Channel Assignment

ACSE Mobile Clearing Call

ACSE Mobile Selective Clear

ACSE Mobile SCPC Begin

ACSE Mobile SCPC Transmitting

ACSE Mobile Authentication Begin

23-15-30

H-6

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

9084

9085

9086

9087

9088

9090

9091

9092

9100

9004

9020

9021

9022

9080

9081

9082

9083

8600

8800

8801

8900

8901

8902

9000

9003

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

8583

8584

8585

8586

ACSE Mobile Authentication End

ACSE Mobile Power Control

ACSE Mobile LES Connect

ACSE Mobile Ringing Begin

MPDS SCPC Mode Selected

ACSE cable call begin

ACSE cable call successful

ACSE Logoff Begin

ACSE Successful Logoff

ACSE No ORR Logoff

ACSE accepts call

ACSE accepted

ACSE rejected

ACSE call waiting

ACSE idle selective clear

ACSE TDM not found

ACSE rejected fixed call due to invalid NSR

ACSE In MRSi

ACSE sounder turned on

ACSE sounder turned off

ACSE in lock

ACSE out of lock

ACSE ext sounder turned on

ACSE ext sounder turned off

ACSE timer about to expire

ACSE Smartcard activated

ACSE Smartcard removed

ACSE Smartcard error

Peripheral on hook

23-15-30

H-7

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

9202

9203

9204

9205

9206

9207

9208

9209

400000

9123

9124

9125

9126

9130

9131

9200

9201

9105

9106

9107

9108

9109

9120

9121

9122

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

9101

9102

9103

9104

Peripheral off hook

Peripheral connected

Peripheral ringing

Peripheral ready

Peripheral hanging up

Peripheral hang up

Peripheral not responding

Peripheral dialing

Peripheral abort dialing

Peripheral DTMF accepted

Peripheral DTMF rejected

Peripheral invalid request

Peripheral valid request

Peripheral bonding auto

Peripheral bonding slave

Peripheral bonding none

Peripheral STU enabled

Peripheral STU disabled

MSG T_AM received

MSG A_AM received

MSG T_HA received

MMI normal

MMI inert

MMI programming

MMI reboot

MMI powerdown

MMI accepted

MMI rejected

CT SP bad

23-15-30

H-8

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

400211

400212

400900

400901

400902

400910

400911

401000

800124

400112

400120

400200

400201

400202

400208

400209

400210

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

400000

400001

400002

400003

No call pending

CT SP good

CT SP full

CT SP access denied

400080

400081

400082

400090

400100

400105

400110

400111

CT SP find

CT SP enumerate

CT SP no entries

CT SP delete

CT SP spot beam selection

CT SP MPDS

CT SP ocean region registration

CT SP ORR query

CT SP log off

CT SP cable call

CT SP go idle

CT SP go idle due to configuration

CT SP selective clear

CT SP go idle clear spot beam

CT SP go idle clear NSR

CT SP go inert

CT SP go inert Smartcard

CT SP go inert DDS poll

CT SP ODU status

CT SP ODU status no alarms

CT SP ODU status DDS

CT SP prod test

CT SP prod test ODU

CT SP clear spot beam

Mobile Aero 64k speech

23-15-30

H-9

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

11D4

11D5

11D6

11D7

11D8

11E0

11E1

12B1

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

800404

800504

800606

800607

Mobile data

Mobile facsimile

Mobile 64k UDI

Mobile 56k UDI

800610

800622

800623

800625

11A0

11D1

11D2

11D3

Mobile 64k audio 3k1

Mobile Aero 64k UDI

Mobile Aero 56k UDI

Mobile Aero 64k audio 3k1

Call cleared, credit card not accepted

Call failed, Request data invalid

Call failed, insufficient digits in service address

Call failed, invalid service address

12C2

12C3

12C4

12C5

12C6

12C7

Call cleared, credit card data information invalid

Call cleared, invalid country code

Call cleared, PID information is not consistent

Call rejected, invalid service for Pri.1 or 2 call

Call cleared, dialed number not 2 or 3 digits for Pr.1 or 2 call

Call cleared, invalid credit card PIN at this LES

Call cleared, too many invalid credit card call attempts

Call cleared by MES for unspecified reason, for example:

• GPS conflict

• Insufficient HPA power available to make call

• HPA over current

Call cleared, no credit card valid message received

Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer)

Call cleared, authentication query not received (usually caused by call setup failure)

Call cleared, MES missing sup service SU

Call cleared, MES missing sup service 2SU

Call cleared, MES missing SCPC channel release SU sup service

23-15-30

H-10

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

15CD

15D1

15D2

15E1

16C2

16C3

18A1

18A2

18A3

15C3

15C4

15C5

15C7

15C9

15CA

15CB

15CC

15A2

15A3

15A4

15A5

15A6

15B1

15C1

15C2

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

12C8

12D1

12D2

15A1

Handover failed, LES not detected

Call failed, Spot-beam data invalid

Call failed, invalid scrambling vector

Call failed, MES not authorized at this LES

Call failed, service not authorized at this LES

Call cleared, credit card not authorized

Call cleared, authentication reply invalid

Call failed, PID not authorized for any service

Call failed, PID not authorized for requested service

Call cleared by LES for unspecified reason

Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment)

Call failed, LES time-out (no service address)

Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector)

Call failed, no service address and no scrambling vector

Call cleared, incomplete credit card data information

Call failed, LES time-out (no MES Connect)

Call cleared, no authentication reply

Call cleared, notification ack not received

Call cleared, invalid sequence number in notification ack

Handover failed, no response to request

Handover failed, MES not ready

Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment)

LES MES already busy

Call cleared but MES still transmitting (FAULT)

LES missing MES SCPC

Handover failed, MES not detected

NCS MES ID not found

Call failed, MES not authorized

Call failed, LES not authorized

23-15-30

H-11

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

90A1

90A2

90A3

90B0

90B1

4000F0

4000F1

4000F2

80010F

8D0FFF

8E0FFF

8F0FFF

90A0

1F11

1F21

1F61

1F62

2F00

2F01

2F02

4000A0

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

18B1

18B2

18C1

18C3

Call failed by NCS for unspecified reason

Call rejected, invalid service requested

NCS MES burst missing

NCS MES busy preemption failed

18D1

18E1

18E2

1F01

Call failed, invalid call request

NCS MES busy already

NCS MES busy already MPDS

Call cleared by terrestrial circuit (normal call termination from ground source)

Call failed, terrestrial party busy

Call failed, LES time-out (no answer)

Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure (call attempted during ORR)

Call failed, early clear by terrestrial circuit

LES int reject lack of MES RESP response

LES int reject lack of MES ARN response

LES int reject incorrect SVECSCPC

CT SP any

CT Terminal ID

CT Options

CT config names

Mobile 64k speech

Mobile Mini-M

Mobile HSD

Mobile

EXPPORT bonding started

EXPPORT bonding ended

EXPPORT remote panel present

EXPPORT remote panel removed

ACSE MPDS mode selected

ACSE SCPC mode selected

23-15-30

H-12

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

B033

B040

B100

B101

B102

B110

B130

B133

B200

B020

B021

B022

B024

B025

B028

B030

B032

90F0

B000

B001

B002

B003

B004

B010

B011

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

90C0

90C1

90D0

90D1

ACSE transmit on

ACSE transmit off

ACSE spot beam handover started

ACSE spot beam termination timer started

Event log wiped

Mod error, general

Mod error, tune failed

Mod error, mode failed

Mod error, mmr failed

Mod error, not responding

MOD Invalid Mode

MOD Command Invalid

Mod error, su underflow

MOD Su overflow

MOD Su not transmitted

MOD invalid frame no

MOD invalid slot no

MOD cannot Tx Su while tuning

MOD channel out of range

MOD cannot tune while Tx

MOD tuning in progress

MOD error watchdog

DEMOD error, general

DEMOD error, tune failed

DEMOD error, mode failed

DEMOD invalid mode

DEMOD channel out of range

DEMOD tuning in progress

Generic modem error

23-15-30

H-13

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

B322

B323

B324

B328

B329

B330

B400

B401

B410

B311

B312

B313

B314

B315

B316

B320

B321

B210

B220

B27F

B280

B281

B300

B301

B310

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

B201

B202

B204

B208

RF error RX VHF

RF error RX Lband

RF error RX VHF

RF error TX Lband

RF error RF error

RF error Ref error

Mod watchdog tripped

Generic voice codec errors

TMS spurious interrupt

Outdoor terminal failure, check connections to ODU

ODU error cannot set cable attenuator

ODU error power response missing

ODU error tune response missing

ODU error HPA control response missing

ODU error HPA status response missing

ODU error alarm response missing

ODU error burst timer response missing

ODU error HPA backoff response missing

ODU error alarm heat

ODU error alarm burst

ODU error alarm power

ODU error alarm over voltage

ODU error alarm reverse power

ODU failed due to tx power check

ODU error alarm timeout

ODU error alarm timeout no trip

Internal temperature of terminal too high, turn off for 10 minutes

Internal temperature sensor failed

Mod error, handshake failure, power down/up and try again

23-15-30

H-14

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

C00623

C00625

CD0FFF

CE0FFF

CF0FFF

FFFD

FFFE

FFFF

Table H-1 Inmarsat Cause Code Definitions (Continued)

Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition

B500

B501

B580

B581

Battery charging communication failure

Power supply error

Battery is over temperature, charging disabled

Battery temperature is now ok, charging enabled

C0010F

C00124

C00404

C00504

C00606

C00607

C00610

C00622

Fixed 64k speech

Fixed Aero 64k speech

Fixed data

Fixed facsimile

Fixed 64k UDI

Fixed 56k UDI

Fixed 64k audio 3k1

Fixed Aero 64k UDI

Fixed Aero 56k UDI

Fixed Aero 64k audio 3k1

Fixed Mini-M

Fixed HSD

Fixed

ACSE end marker (MPDS)

Status undefined (MPDS)

Status OK (MPDS)

23-15-30

H-15

3 JUN 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion ® HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

Blank Page

23-15-30

H-16

3 JUN 10

Key features

Inmarsat system integration
Swift 64 voice and data calls
SwiftBroadband services
Cockpit communication interface
Ethernet and ISDN connectivity
Maintenance and diagnostic tools
Detailed installation instructions
Troubleshooting and fault isolation
Repair procedures
Airworthiness requirements

Frequently asked questions

The terminal requires either 115 V ac or 28 V dc power.

You can configure the terminal using the Maintenance Port Utility (MPU) or the EMS ORT application.

The terminal supports ISDN, Ethernet, and POTS data connections.

Use the troubleshooting table and diagnostic procedures outlined in the manual to identify and resolve issues.

The manual provides details on repair tools, supplies, and procedures. You can also contact EMS Aviation for repair services.

eNfusion

®

HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual

CUSTOMER RESPONSE FORM

Publication information:

Customer information:

Comments and suggestions:

RECORD OF REVISIONS

SERVICE BULLETIN LIST

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES

LIST OF TABLES

INTRODUCTION

1. Illustration of Equipment

2. Product Terms and Conditions

3. Acronyms and Abbreviations

4. Safety Advisories

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. Inmarsat System Overview

2. Equipment Overview

3. Equipment Specifications

4. System Interfaces

5. User Interfaces

6. Software Description

SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Registering and Activating Terminals

2. Configuring Terminals

3. Using Terminals

INSTALLATION

1. Advisories

2. Pre-Installation Inspection

3. Mechanical Installation

4. Electrical Installation

5. Passive Intermodulation (PIM) Test

6. Installation and Engineering Diagrams

7. Connection Details

TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION

1. Operational and Diagnostic Testing

2. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation

3. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures

4. Modification History

MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

1. Maintenance

2. Repair

3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

CONFIGURING THE OWNERS REQUIREMENTS TABLE

(ORT)

1. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the MPU

2. Configuring ORT Parameters Using the EMS ORT Application

PPENDIX

NMARSAT

ATELLITE

EAM

OVERAGE

1. I-3 Satellites

2. I-4 Satellites

PPENDIX

ROUBLESHOOTING

HECKLIST

PPENDIX

ABLE

ERMINATION

ETAILS

PPENDIX

NSTALLATION

LANNING

HECKLIST

PPENDIX

NSTALLATION

HECKLIST

PPENDIX

ESSAGES

1. Understanding Messages Transmitted to the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

2. Understanding Messages Received from the HSD-440 Mark 2 Terminal

3. Understanding BOP Options

4. Understanding LDUs and File Size

5. Understanding LDU Size and Word Count

6. Understanding Word Format